Skip to main content

Full text of "The California gray whale : papers presented at the California Gray Whale Workshop, Scripps Institution of Oceanography, 21-22 August 1972"

See other formats


Volume  36     Number  4     April1974 


„r* 


c 

1:. 


<b. 


T 


•^^4  7-FS  O^ 


Marine  Fisheries 
REVIEW 

National  Oceanic  and  Atmospheric  Administration  •  National  Marine  Fisheries  Service 


SPECIAL  NUMBBt 


1HE  CAUFORNIA  GRAf  WHALE 


Volume  36     Number  4     April  1974 


c 


<^0       ^^4»>^      -vV'^ 


•^'■/irEs  o^ 


Marine  Fisheries 
REVIEW 

National  Oceanic  and  Atmospheric  Administration  •  National  Marine  Fisheries  Service 


SPECIAL  NUMBER 


THE  CAUFORNIA  GRAY  WHALE 


Marine  Fisheries  Review 

Vol.36,  No.  4 
April  1974 

CONTENTS 


Articles 

1  Preface.  W.  E.  Evans 

2  Introductory  Remarks.  Brian  J.  Rothschild 

3  Respiration  and  Metabolism  in  Two  Baleen  Whale  Calves,  Eric  A.  Wahren- 
brock.  Gary  F.  Maruschak.  Robert  Eisner,  and  David  W.  Kenney 

9  Ballistocardiography  as  a  Technique  for  Comparative  Physiology.  N.  Ty 

Smith  and  Eric  A.  Wahrenbrock 
15   Investigation  of  Blubber  Thickness  in  a  Gray  Whale  Using  Ultrasonography. 

Michael  P.  Curran  and  William  M.  Asher 
20  Surgical  Attachment  of  a  Telemetry  Device  to  the  Dorsal  Ridge  of  a  Yearling 

California  Gray  Whale.  Eschiichtius  lubiisiiis.  John  C.  Sweeney  and  Joel 

L.  Mattsson 
22  Some   Hematologic   Observations   on   the  California   Gray   Whale.   Alfred 

Zettner 

24  Some   Coagulation    Factors    in    Plasma    from    a   California    Gray   Whale. 
Em  hrii  hiiiis  nihii.\tii\.  W.  Medway 

25  Fluorescent  Karyotype  of  the  California  Gray  Whale,  Deborah  A.  Duffield 
28  Some  Physiological  Parameters  of  the  Blood  of  the  California  Gray  Whale, 

William  G.  Gilmartin.  Richard  W.  Pierce,  and  George  A.  Antonelis.  Jr. 
31   Feeding  of  a  Captive  Gray  Whale,  G.  Carleton  Ray  and  William  E.  Schevill 
38   Sounds  Produced  by  the  Gray  Whale.  Eschiichtius  nihiisiiis.  James  F.  Fish. 

James  L.  Sumich.  and  George  L.  Lingle 
45  Aerial  Observations  of  Migrating  Gray  Whales,  Esclirichiitis  rohiisiiis.  off 

Southern  California,  1969-72,  J.  S.  Leatherwood 

50  A  Note  on  Gray  Whale  Behavioral  Interactions  with  Other  Marine  Mam- 
mals. J.  S.  Leatherwood 

51  Aerial  Observations  of  Gray  Whales  During  197.^.  Paul  N.  Sund  and  John 
L.  O'Connor 

52  Telemetering  of  Temperature  and  Depth  Data  from  a  Free  Ranging  Year- 
ling California  Gray  Whale,  Eschrichiiiis  rohtisms.  W.  E.  Evans 

58  Capture  and   Harnessing  of  Young  California  Gray  Whales.   Eschrichiiiis 
rohiisiKs.  Kenneth  S.  Norris  and  Roger  L.  Gentry 


Cover. — Alter  almosi  a  year  in  capllvlly,  the 
Calilornia  gray  whale.  Gigi  II,  Is  carried  in  a 
special  cradle  aboard  ship  to  the  site  where 
she  will  later  be  released.  Photograph,  courtesy 
of  Audio  Visual  Prod.  Div.,  Naval  Undersea 
Center,  San  Diego.  Calif. 


U.S.  DEPARTMENT  OF  COMMERCE 
Frederick  B.  Dent,  Secretary 

NATIONAL  OCEANIC  AND 

ATMOSPHERIC  ADMINISTRATION 

Robert  M.  White,  Administrator 

National  Marine  Fisheries  Service 
Robert  W.  Schoning,  Director 


Address  correspondence  to:  Marine 
Fisheries  Review,  NMFS  Scientific 
Publications  Staff,  Room  450,  1107 
N.E.  45th  St.,  Seattle,  WA  98105. 

Publication  of  material  from  sources 
outside  the  Service  is  not  an  endorse- 
ment. The  Service  is  not  responsible 
for  the  accuracy  of  facts,  views,  or 
opinions  of  these  sources. 

Although  the  contents  have  not  been 
copyrighted  and  may  be  reprinted 
freely,  reference  to  source  is 
appreciated. 

The  Secretary  of  Commerce  has  de- 
termined that  the  publication  of  this 
periodical  is  necessary  in  the  trans- 
action of  public  business  required  by 
law  of  this  Department.  Use  of  funds 
for  printing  this  periodical  has  been 
approved  by  the  Director,  Office 
of  Management  and  Budget,  May  10, 
1973. 


Editor;  Thomas  A.  Manar 
Managing  Editor;  Willis  L.  Hobart 


For  sale  by  the  Superintendent  of 
Documents,  U.S.  Government  Print- 
ing Office,  Washington,  DC  20402. 
Price  $1.25  (single  copy).  Subscrip- 
tion price;  $12.50  a  year,  $15.75  a 
year  for  foreign  mailing. 


Marine  Fisheries  Review 

Vol.36,  No.  4 
April  1974 

CONTENTS 

Articles 

1  Preface.  W.  E.  Evans 

2  Introductory  Remarks.  Brian  J.  Rothschild 

3  Respiration  and  Metabolism  in  Two  Baleen  Whale  Calves,  Eric  A.  Wahren- 
brock.  Gary  F.  Maruschak.  Robert  Eisner,  and  David  W.  Kenney 

9   Ballistocardiography  as  a  Technique  for  Comparative  Physiology.  N.  Ty 
Smith  and  Eric  A.  Wahrenbrock 

15   Investigation  of  Blubber  Thickness  in  a  Gray  Whale  Using  Utrasonography, 

Michael  P.  Curran  and  William  M.  Asher 
20  Surgical  Attachment  of  a  Telemetry  Device  to  the  Dorsal  Ridge  of  a  Yearling 

California  Gray  Whale.   Eschiichliiis  rohustus.  John  C.  Sweeney  and  Joel 

L,  Mattsson 

22  Some   Hematologic   Observations   on   the  California   Gray   Whale.   Alfred 
Zettner 

24  Some   Coagulation    Factors    in    Plasma    from    a   California    Gray   Whale. 
Escliricli litis  rohiisnis,  W.  Medway 

25  Fluorescent  Karyotype  of  the  California  Gray  Whale.  Deborah  A.  DufHeld 

28  Some  Physiological  Parameters  of  the  Blood  of  the  California  Gray  Whale. 
William  G.  Gilmartin.  Richard  W.  Pierce,  and  George  A.  Antonelis.  Jr. 

31    Feeding  of  a  Captive  Gray  Whale.  G.  Carleton  Ray  and  William  E.  Schevill 

38   Sounds  Produced  by  the  Gray  Whale.  Eschrichtiiis  rohiislus,  James  F.  Fish. 
James  L.  Sumich.  and  George  L.  Lingle 

45   Aerial  Observations  of  Migrating  Gray  Whales,   Esclirichtius  rahiisius.  off 
.Southern  California,  1969-72,  J.  S.  Leatherwood 

50  A  Note  on  Gray  Whale  Behavioral   Interactions  with  Other  Marine  Mam- 
mals, J.  S.  Leatherwood 

51  Aerial  Observations  of  Gray  Whales  During   1973.  Paul  N.  Sund  and  John 
L.  O'Connor 

52  Telemetering  of  Temperature  and  Depth  Data  from  a  Free  Ranging  Year- 
ling California  Gray  Whale.  Escliriclilius  rohusnis,  W.  E.  Evans 

58  Capture  and   Harnessing  of  Young  California  Gray  Whales,  E\i.hiii.litiiis 
nihusiiis.  Kenneth  S.  Norris  and  Roger  L.  Gentry 


Cover. — Alter  almost  a  year  in  captivity,  ttie 
Caiitornia  gray  whale.  Gigi  II.  is  carried  in  a 
special  cradle  aboard  ship  to  the  site  where 
she  will  later  be  released.  Photograph,  courtesy 
of  Audio  Visual  Prod.  Div.,  Naval  Undersea 
Center,  San  Olego,  Calif, 


U.S.  DEPARTMENT  OF  COMMERCE 
Fretlerick  B.  Dent,  Secretary 

NATIONAL  OCEANIC  AND 

ATMOSPHERIC  ADMINISTRATION 

Robert  M.  White,  Administrator 

National  Marine  Fisheries  Service 
Robert  W.  Schoning,  Director 


,„o»;w^,. 


Address  correspondence  to:  Marine 
Fisheries  Review,  NMFS  Scientific 
Publications  Staff,  Room  450,  1107 
N.E.   45th   St.,  Seattle,  WA  98105. 

Publication  of  material  from  sources 
outside  the  Service  is  not  an  endorse- 
ment. The  Service  is  not  responsible 
for  the  accuracy  of  facts,  views,  or 
opinions  of  these  sources. 

Although  the  contents  have  not  been 
copyrighted  and  may  be  reprinted 
freely,  reference  to  source  is 
appreciated. 

The  Secretary  of  Commerce  has  de- 
termined that  the  publication  of  this 
periodical  is  necessary  in  the  trans- 
action of  public  business  required  by 
law  of  this  Department.  Use  of  funds 
for  printing  this  periodical  has  been 
approved  by  the  Director,  Office 
of  Management  and  Budget,  May  10, 
1973. 


Editor:  Thomas  A,  Manar 
Managing  Editor:  Willis  L.  Hobart 


For  sale  by  the  Superintendent  of 
Documents,  U.S.  Government  Print- 
ing Office,  Washington,  DC  20402. 
Price  $1.25  (single  copy).  Subscrip- 
tion price:  $12,50  a  year,  $15.75  a 
year  for  foreign  mailing. 


■'Ol-f,  MASS. 
:-f.  0.  1. 


fflS 


=  -0 
=  -i3 
5  -D 

:  CD 
i  CD 

i  □ 


The  California 
Gray  Whale 


Papers  presented  at  the 

California  Gray  Wtiale  Workshop, 

University  of  California, 

San  Diego,  Scripps  Institution 

of  Oceanography, 

21-22  August  1972. 


Sponsored  by 

Southwest  Fisheries  Center, 
La  Jolla  Laboratory,  National 
Marine  Fisheries  Service,  NOAA 


and 

U.S.  Department  of  the  Navy's 
Naval  Undersea  Center, 
San  Diego. 


^ 


o 
o 

% 


.1930 


'•P 


CARL  L.  HUBBS,  Chairman. 
W.  E.  EVANS,  Editor. 


PREFACE 

In  early  March  1971  an  expedition 
sponsored  by  Sea  World.  Inc.  of  .San 
Diego,  under  the  direction  of  David 
W.  Kenney  with  scientific  support 
from  the  University  of  California. 
San  Diego,  captured  a  newborn  female 
California  gray  whale  [Eschrichiius 
ri>hu.'itns)  in  Scammon's  Lagoon.  Baja 
California  Sur.  Mexico.  This  whale, 
5.84  meters  long  and  weighing  1.952 
kilograms,  arrived  at  Sea  World  in 
San  Diego  on  17  March  1971. 

Although  not  the  first  successful 
capture  of  an  immature  California 
gray  whale,  this  was  however  the  be- 
ginning of  a  successful  year  of  mainte- 
nance in  captivity  and  the  subsequent 
release  into  the  wild,  the  first  time  for 
any  species  of  baleen  whale.  The 
results  of  the  scientific  studies  con- 
ducted during  this  year  of  captivity 
and  the  later  field  observations  which 
were  stimulated  by  the  release  of  this 
unique  whale,  are  the  subject  of  this 
publication. 

Many  important  contributors  to 
our  overall  understanding  of  the  com- 
plexities of  the  biology  of  the  Cali- 
fornia gray  whale  are  not  formally 
represented  in  this  report  as  contribu- 
tors. The  impact  of  the  work  of  Carl 
L.  Hubbs.  Scripps  Institution  of 
Oceanography.  University  of  Califor- 
nia, San  Diego,  La  Jolla;  Raymond 
Gilmore,  Museum  of  Natural  History, 
San  Diego;  and  Dale  Rice,  National 
Marine   Fisheries   Service.   Northwest 


1 


Fisheries  Center.  Seattle.  Wash.,  as 
pioneers  in  estabUshing  the  basis  for 
our  present  knowledge  of  the  status 
of  the  gray  whale  population  cannot 
be  overstated. 

Special  acknowledgement  is  also 
due  David  W.  Kenney.  of  Poway, 
Calif,  for  his  efforts  in  successfully 
capturing  and  maintaining  in  good 
health  the  immature  gray  whale 
named  Gig!  II.  the  subject  of  most 
of  the  research  reported  here.  Dr. 
Kenney  should  be  applauded  for  his 
persistence  in  overcoming  seemingly 
insurmountable  opposition.  Many  of 
Dr.  Kenney 's  colleagues  were  doubt- 
ful that  a  newly  born  gray  whale 
could  be  successfully  maintained  alive 
in  captivity  for  more  than  a  few 
months,  let  alone  one  year.  Yet,  this 

INTRODUCTORY  REMARKS 

BRIAN  J.  ROTHSCHILD 

It  is  a  great  pleasure  to  welcome 
you  to  the  California  Gray  Whale 
Workshop.  The  Workshop  is  being 
held  in  a  significant  location  and  at 
a  particularly  appropriate  time. 

The  location.  La  Jolla.  is  of  course, 
quite  near  the  area  surveyed  as  part 
of  the  well-known  California  gray 
whale  census  and  is  also  a  focal  region 
for  other  studies  on  the  dynamics 
and  life  history  of  the  California  gray 
whale.  Some  of  this  research  will  be 
presented  at  this  Workshop  where  you 
will  hear  about  such  diverse  topics  as 
husbandry,  respiration  and  metabolism, 
cardiovascular  physiology  and  blood 
studies  and  behavior  and  physiology  — 
all  related  to  the  California  gray 
whale. 

In  addition  to  being  a  region  where 
many  contemporary  studies  on  the 
gray  whale  have  been  undertaken,  it 
was  also  in  this  general  area  of  the 
North  American  coast  that  Charles 
M.    Scammon.    whaler    and    sometime 


Brian  J.  Rothschild  is  Director, 
Southwest  Fisheries  Center,  Na- 
tional Marine  Fisheries  Service, 
NOAA,  La  Jolla,  CA  92037. 


goal  was  achieved  with  overwhelming 
success.  From  predictions  of  normal 
growth.  Gigi  should  have  reached  a 
total  weight  of  5.946  kilograms  and 
a  length  of  8.30  meters  by  20  March 
1972.  During  her  last  week  in  captiv- 
ity (6-13  March  1972).  Gigi  II  was 
weighed  three  or  four  times.  Due  to 
the  use  of  three  different  scales  and 
two  different  conditions  of  weigh- 
ing (i.e.,  animal  fasting  and  animal 
fed  prior  to  weighing),  her  final 
weights  ranged  from  5,364  kg  to 
6,350  kg.  This  weight  range  remark- 
ably brackets  the  predicted  weight 
previously  mentioned.  Her  final  over- 
all length  on  13  March  1972  was 
8.15  meters,  also  significantly  close 
to  the  predicted  length  of  8.30  meters 
based  on  normal  growth.  W.E.E. 


captain  in  the  U.S.  Revenue  Marine, 
undertook  his  early  studies  of  the 
natural  history  of  the  gray  whale.  His 
studies  "The  Marine  Mammals  of  the 
North-Western  Coast  of  North  Amer- 
ica." were  published  in  1874.  Many 
of  Captain  Scammon's  observations 
on  the  gray  whale  were  made  in  the 
mid-1850's  when  he  discovered  a 
major  nursery  ground  of  the  Califor- 
nia gray  whale  in  a  Baja  California 
embayment.  Laguna  Ojo  de  Liebre. 
now  frequently  called  Scammon's  La- 
goon. Scammon  was  also  involved  in 
(he  early,  intensive  harvest  of  this 
species,  an  activity  that  was  terminat- 
ed in  1946  when  the  International 
Whaling  Commission  declared  the 
gray  whale  a  protected  species. 

The  timing  of  this  symposium  is 
also  appropriate.  There  is  now  an 
unprecedented  interest  in  marine  mam- 
mals. TV.  radio,  motion  pictures, 
newspapers  and  magazines  have  all 
contributed  to  a  growing  public  aware- 
ness and  concern  with  these  fascinat- 
ing animals.  Unfortunately,  this  de- 
luge of  publicity  has  resulted  in  a 
mixture  of  fact  and  fiction.  The  tic- 
tion   has   been    further  fed   b\    various 


indiscriminate  interpretations  which 
often  accompany  events  of  high  pub- 
licity value,  inadequate  data  collec- 
tion, and  difficulties  in  interpreting 
the  sparse  marine  mammal  data.  Fur- 
ther complications  arise  from  conflict- 
ing and  contradictory  views  of  special 
interest  groups  that  influence  resource 
decisions.  A  case  in  point  is.  of  course, 
the  blue  whale. 

Because  this  is  also  a  time  when 
significant  policy  and  conservation 
decisions  are  being  made  on  marine 
mammals,  it  is  particularly  important 
to  concentrate  on  the  generation  of 
factual  information.  The  conservation 
of  our  resources  is  essentially  a  deci- 
sion-making process;  this  process  can 
only  be  effective  if  decision-makers 
are  supplied  with  appropriate  facts. 
Workshops  such  as  this  California 
Gray  Whale  Workshop  will  do  much 
to  contribute  to  our  understanding 
and  knowledge  of  marine  mammals 
and  assist  in  making  better  resource 
decisions  which  hopefully  will  preserve 
these  Leviathans  for  the  education 
and  enjoyment  of  future  generations. 

I  think  Herman  Melville  had  a 
premonition  that  all  of  this  would 
come  to  pass;  that  status  of  marine 
mammal  stocks  would  be  of  world 
concern  and  as  a  small  part  of  this 
concern  we  would  be  holding  our 
workshop.  In  fact  he  could  be  before 
you  now  saying,  as  he  did  in  Mohy 
Dick: 

"Already  we  are  boldly  launched 
upon  the  deep;  but  soon  we  shall 
be  lost  in  its  unshored,  harborless 
immensities.  Ere  that  come  to  pass; 
ere  the  Pequod's  weedy  hull  rolls 
side  by  side  with  the  barnacled 
hulls  of  the  Leviathan;  at  the  outset 
it  is  but  well  to  attend  to  a  matter 
almost  indispensable  to  a  thorough 
appreciative  understanding  of  the 
more  special  leviathanic  revela- 
tions and  allusions  of  all  sorts 
which  are  to  follow. 

It  is  some  systematized  exhibi- 
tion of  the  whale  in  his  broad 
genera,  that  I  would  now  fain  put 
before  you.  Yet  is  it  no  easy  task. 
The  classification  of  the  constitu- 
ents of  a  chaos,  nothing  less  is  here 
essayed.  Listen  to  what  the  best  and 
latest  authorities  have  laid  down  .  .  ." 


MFR  PAPER  1045 


Respiration  and  Metabolism  in 
Two  Baleen  Whale  Calves 


F.RIC  A.  WAHRENBROCK,  GARY  F.  MARUSCHAK, 
ROBERT  ELSNER,  and  DAVID  W.  KENNEY 


ABSTRACT 


Eric  A.  Wahrenbrock  and  Gary 
F.  Maruschak  are  members  of 
the  staff  of  the  Anesthesia  Labo- 
ratory of  the  School  of  Medicine, 
University  of  California,  San 
Diego.  La  Jolla,  CA  92037. 
Robert  Eisner  is  a  member  of 
the  staff  of  the  Physiological 
Research  Laboratory  of  Scripps 
Institution  of  Oceanography. 
L'niversitv  of  California.  San 
Diego,  P^O.  Box  109.  La  Jolla, 
CA  92037.  David  W.  Kenney 
was  formerly  a  member  of  the 
staff  of  Sea  World.  Inc..  San 
Diego.  Calif.;  his  present  address 
is  14220  Poway  Rd..  Poway, 
CA  92064. 


W-V  perfonucd  rcspiiiilnry  unci  mcuiholic  sliulics  on  two  female  gray  whale 
calves.  Allhongh  one  died  2  inonlhs  after  capture,  the  other  thrived  during  a 
year'.f  captivity,  pennitting  serial  observations  while  growing,  and  weiglied  in 
e.Kcess  of  6.350  kg  when  released.  They  appeared  to  he  of  normal  size  and 
weight  compared  to  whtdes  in  the  wild.  Relative  increases  in  body  length  and 
weight,  lung  volume,  minute  ventilation,  and  metabolic  rale  were  similar  to 
those  in  terrestrial  mammals,  as  was  the  growth  efficiency.  Lung  volume  and 
metabolic  rate  could  be  predicted  with  only  partial  success  from  the  relation- 
ships of  those  variables  to  body  weight  proposed  by  Tenney  and  Kleiber,  per- 
haps due  to  intniuturity  in  the  whales. 

Compared  to  terrestrial  mammals,  tite  ratio  of  tidal  volume  to  resting  lung 
volume  in  the  wliule  was  large,  while  the  ratio  of  wasted  ventilation  to  tidal 
volume  was  small.  We  measured  respiratory  excursions  of  arterial  Oi  and  CO2 
tensions  of  36  and  16  mm  Hg,  respectively,  consonant  with  the  relationships 
between  respiratory  rate,  lung  volume,  tidal  volume,  and  metabolic  rate. 


INTRODUCTION 

Although  the  physiology  of  toothed 
whales.  particularU  porpoises,  has 
been  studied  at  some  length  (Irving. 
Scholander,  and  Grinnell.  1941:  Olsen. 
Eisner.  Hale,  and  Kenney,  1969; 
Olsen.  Hale,  and  Eisner.  1969;  Scho- 
lander. 1940),  the  study  of  living 
baleen  whales  has  been  particularly 
elusive.  The  size  and  dietary  habits 
of  these  large  mammals  present  for- 
midable obstacles  to  their  maintenance 
in  captivity,  and  these  obstacles  are 
compounded  by  ignorance  of  the 
whales'  growth  rate,  dietary  require- 
ments, metabolism,  and  hematologic 
and  cardiorespiratory  physiology. 

However,  these  and  other  aspects 
of  the  biology  of  baleen  whales  are, 
in  many  respects,  unique  among  mam- 
mals:    research    would    therefore    be 


doubly  rewarding.  This  line  of  rea- 
soning led  to  the  capture  and  study 
of  the  two  animals  reported  herein, 
and  to  this  workshop. 

We  were  naturally  inclined  toward 
studies  of  especial  personal  interest, 
and  recognize  their  limited  scope 
and  serious  omissions  (cardiac  out- 
put, for  example).  We  are  here  re- 
porting observations  on  growth,  res- 
piratory function,  and  metabolic 
rate:  additional  reports  of  detailed 
nutritional,  metabolic,  biochemical 
and  hemotologic  studies;  inert  and 
anesthetic  gas  uptake;  and  respira- 
tory mechanics  will  follow. 

METHODS 

The  first  gray  whale  calf  (Gigi  1) 
was  captured  in  Scammon's  Lagoon, 
Baja  California,    Mexico  in    February 


1965  and  brought  to  San  Diego, 
where  a  number  of  respiratory  and 
metabolic  studies  were  performed. 
Although  the  whale  at  first  seemed 
to  thrive,  it  died  of  an  uncontrollable 
infection  about  2  months  after  it 
was  captured. 

The  second  calf.  Gigi  II,  was  cap- 
tured in  March  1971,  again  in  Scam- 
mon's Lagoon,  and  was  again  kept 
in  (increasingly  larger)  pools  at  an 
oceanarium  in  San  Diego.  Gigi  11 
thrived  indeed:  gained  in  size,  was 
weaned,  was  studied  intensively,  and 
was  reluctantly  (but  inevitably)  re- 
leased almost  exactly  a  year  after 
her  capture. 

Two  of  the  authors  were  members 
of  each  of  the  expeditions  (DWK.  and 
RE  on  the  first,  and  DWK  and  EAW 
on  the  second)  and  one  of  us  (DWK) 
was  responsible  for  the  medical  care 
of   both    animals    while    in    captivity. 

For  most  of  the  studies  reported 
here,  the  water  level  in  the  tank  was 
lowered  so  as  to  nearly  immobilize 
the  whale,  leaving  about  12  inches 
of  dorsal  body  surface  above  the  wa- 
ter level,  and  the  blowhole  barely 
awash.  A  few  of  the  studies  were  per- 
formed with  the  whale  completely 
stranded  on  the  bottom  of  the  empty 
tank. 

The  respiratory  pattern  in  whales 
and  other  marine  mammals  consists 
of  an  expiration  followed  by  an  im- 
mediate inspiration,  followed  by  an 
interrespiratory    pause    during    which 


the  airway  is  closed.  The  duration  of 
the  pause  in  Gigi  11  was  ahout  I 
minute,  and  inspiration  and  expiration 
together  required  about  2  seconds. 
Two  observations  can  be  made  from 
this  respiratory  pattern  (commonly 
called  ■■apncustic'"):  I)  a  valve  would 
be  needed  in  order  to  separate  inspira- 
tion from  expiration,  and  2)  resting 
lung  volume  is  different  from  that  in 
terrestrial  mammals,  because  in  ceta- 
ceans it  includes  the  tidal  volume. 

Accordingly,  we  fabricated  nonrc- 
breathing  valves:  first  of  approximate- 
ly 5  inches  diameter,  and  later  (for 
Gigi  ID  of  8  inch  stovepipe  (Figure 
I),  thus  permitting  us  to  collect  un- 
contaminated  exhaled  gas.  For  Gigi  1 
a  large,  calibrated,  counterbalanced, 
bellows-tvpe  spirometer  was  used:  and 
for  Gigi  11.  expired  gas  was  collected 
in  900  liter  meteorological  balloons. 
The  volume  of  exhaled  gas  was  then 
measured  by  emptying  the  balloons 
through  a  calibrated  dry  gas  meter 
(Wright  Respirometer  or  American 
Meter  Co.)'  at  a  constant,  known 
flowrate.  Aliquots  of  mixed  expired 
gas  from  Gigi  I  were  analyzed  for  Og 
and  CO2  with  a  .Scholander  apparatus, 
and  for  Gigi  II  with  a  moditied  Hal- 
dane  apparatus  (Lloyd-Gallenkamp). 
as  were  samples  of  end-tidal  gas,  ob- 
tained from  a  port  just  beyond  the 
expiratory  valve  leaflet  of  the  nonre- 
breathing  device. 

Resting  lung  volume  was  measured 
in  Gigi  II  by  injecting  1.50  liters  of 
pure  helium  into  the  inspiratory  port 
of  the  nonrebreathing  valve  during 
inspiration.  The  subsequent  expira- 
tion was  captured,  and  mixed  expired 
gas  analyzed  for  helium  with  a  sensi- 
tive, calibrated  katharometer  (W.  F. 
Collins). 

Arterial  blood  was  drawn  Irom 
Gigi  II  bs  percutaneous  puncture  of 
the  digital  artery  in  a  flipper  with  an 
18  gauge  3  inch  needle,  and  arterial 
placement  ensured  by  observing  pul- 
sations of  blood  through  the  needle. 
Because    of  the   configuration    of   the 


'  Reference  to  name  of  firm  does  not  imply 
endorsement  by  tfie  National  Marine  Fisheries 
Services,  NCAA 


arterial  and  \enular  system,  it  is  pos- 
sible that  arterial  blood  was  contam- 
inated at  times  with  venous  blood. 
Some  of  the  gas  samples  from  Gigi  11. 
and  all  of  her  blood  samples,  were 
analyzed  for  O2  and  CO.,  tensions 
(/'02  and  ^002'  w''h  a  hlood  gas 
analyzer  (Radiometer  BMS-3).  with 
which  blood  pH  could  also  be  deter- 
mined. 

From  timed  gas  collections  during 
which  the  number  of  breaths  was 
also  counted,  respiratory  rate,  minute 
ventilation,  tidal  volume,  oxygen  con- 
sumption, and  wasted  ventilation  (or 
•dead  space"  fraction.  ^jIV,)  could 
thus  be  determined  by  suitable  analysis. 

RESULTS 

In  the  first  few  weeks  of  captivity, 
each  whale  lost  weight,  but  gained 
thereafter  (Figure  2).  The  rate  of  gain 
during  the  first  8  months  was  about 
200  kg/mo  in  Gigi  II.2  She  was 
weaned  at  about  7  months  of  age.  as 
are  calves  in  the  wild  (Rice  and  Wol- 
man.  1971).  At  age  10  months,  she 
entered  a  very  rapid  growth  phase 
during  which  her  food  intake  increased 
from  about  1.200  to  about  1.800 
pounds  of  squid/day.  and  her  rate 
of  gain  in  weight  increased  almost  5 
fold,  to  970  kg/mo  or  (for  those  of 
us  who  enjoy  such  reductions)  approx- 
imately -3  pounds/hour.  Each  whale 
gained  in  length  regularly:  although 
Gigi  1  was  smaller  than  Gigi  II  when 
captured,  their  increases  in  body  size 
were  similar  (Figure  .^).  This  suggests 
that  the  infection  did  not  seriously 
impede  her  growth. 

Respiratory  rate  (/)  was  counted  on 
manv  occasions;  it  varied  with  the 
whales'  activity.  It  averaged  2/niin 
for  Gigi  1  at  first,  and  increased  to  4 
or  .s/min  after  age  2  months.  However, 
this  whale  had  atelectasis  and  pneu- 
monia secondary  to  a  harpoon  wound. 


2  Both  calves  were  first  fed  by  gavage.  and  in 
botti  trie  liquid  diet  was  gradually  changed 
from  mainly  whipping  cream  to  a  mixture  of 
ground  squid,  ground  bonita,  calcium  casemate, 
yeast,  and  corn  oil  For  Gigi-ll.  the  proportion 
of  squid  in  the  diet  was  gradually  increased 
until  the  lime  of  weaning 


Figure  1. — NonbreathJng  valve  tor  Gigi  II, 
constructed  of  8  inch  stovepipe  and  containing 
one  quarter  inch  neoprene  foam  rubber  valve 
leaflets.  Inspiration  was  from  the  side-arm,  and 
the  inspiratory  valve  leaf  and  its  supporting  ring 
were  slanted  so  that  closure  was  assisted  by 
gravity. 


AGE    SIZE 


Figure  2. — The  whale  was  weighed  with  an 
industrial  heavy  duly  scale  (Dynamometer)  by 
lifting  her  from  the  water  with  a  crane  while 
supported  on  a  canvas  and  pipe  slrelcher,  and 
subtracting  the  tare  weight.  Body  length  was 
measured  on  a  straight  line  from  lips  to  no4ch 
in  fluke.  Dala  from  Gigi  I  are  represented  by 
open  circtes  and  squares,  and  tor  Gigi  ft  by 
solid  symbols.  Length  in  meters  on  left  hand 
scale;  weight  in  thousands  of  kilograms  on 
right  hand  scale. 


leaving  the  ineamng  of  this  observa- 
tion somewhat  uncertain.  When  Gigi 
II  was  motionless,  or  nearly  so,  /' 
averaged  1/min,  irrespective  of  age. 
Accordingly,  tidal  volume  (  F,)  and 
minute  ventilation  were  nearly  equal 
(Figures  4,  5).  Each  value  for  F,  is  an 
average  of  three  or  more  measure- 
ments, as  we  observed  that    \\   varied 


7 
6 

WEIGHT    LENGTH 

/ 1-:: 

5 

/ 

4 

'■5  ,                                                   / 

3 

2 

^^^ 

1- 

METERS 

Figure  3. — Weight  plotted  as  a 
(unction  of  length  in  the  two 
gray  whale  calves.  Data  from 
Gigi  I  is  represented  by  squares, 
and  from  Gigi  II  by  circles.  At 
the  time  of  the  rapid  weight 
increase  Gigi  II  was  approxi- 
mately 9.5  months  old.  Gil  more 
(1961)  reported  data  from  one 
calf  which  died  after  being 
stranded  in  San  Francisco  Bay. 
Data  from  Rice  and  Wolman 
(1971)  represent  north  and 
southbound  calves  (lower  and 
upper  points  respectively):  the 
difference  supports  the  hypothe- 
sis that  gray  whales  fast  during 
the  southern  migration. 


LUNG 

VOLUME 

. 

400 

/ 

IITE»S 

/ 

300- 

/ 

•        / 

200 

/ 

/• 

100 

• 

WEIGHT 

kg  X   10^ 

-[ 

200  - 

TIDAL   VOLUME 

/ 

150- 

/ 

- 

LITERS                                              / 

100- 

50- 

••/ 

WEIGHT 

1 \ 1 1— 

kg  X    10' 

1 1 1 

Figure  4. — Tidal  volume  (V|)  in  a  gray  whale 
calf  during  the  first  year  of  life.  Tlie  regression 
equation  for  tlie  line  is:  V(  =  (47  ^  body 
weigtit  in  metric  Ions)  -  70.  Tlie  correlation 
coefficient  r  =  0.99. 


MINUTE    VENTILATION 


I  4-    LITERS 


markedly  from  one  breath  to  the  next, 
sometimes  by  50  percent. 

Resting  lung  volume.  (Figure  6) 
necessarily  varied  from  breath  to 
breath  also,  and  in  addition,  the  mea- 
surement was  technically  difficult  be- 
cause of  the  difference  between  in- 
spired and  expired  \\.  Nevertheless, 
five  measurements  were  felt  to  be 
adequate.  Two  measurements  were 
made  at  weight  =  6.150  kg.  one 
when  awash  and  one  when  stranded 
on  the  bottom  of  the  completely 
drained  tank.  Lung  volume  was  re- 
duced by  about  20  percent  by  strand- 
ing, although  that  value  was  deter- 
mined only  once. 

From  time  collections  of  mixed  ex- 
pired gas.  oxygen  consumption  was 
computed  (Figure  7).  The  composi- 
tion of  end  tidal  gas  from  Gigi  I! 
was  determined  on  several  occasions, 
and  did  not  vary  systematically  with 
age.    End   tidal    ^02   varied   from   54 


Figure  5. —  Minute  ventilation 
(Vf)  in  two  gray  wtiale  calves, 
expressed  as  a  function  of  body 
weigfil.  Ttie  triangle  represents 
data  from  observations  in  Gigi  I. 
Ttie  regression  equation  for  Itie 
data  from  Gigi  II  (circles)  is: 
V£  =  (70  X  body  weight  in 
metric  tons)  -  117.  Although 
the  r  =  0.94  for  this  rectilinear 
regression,  it  is  apparent  that  a 
sigmoid  curve  could  be  even 
more    closely    filled    to    the    data. 


Figure  6.  —  Resting  lung  volume  in  a  gray  whale 
calf  (Gigi  II),  expressed  as  a  function  of  body 
weight.  Resting  lung  volume  includes  tidal 
volume,  and  is  the  volume  of  gas  in  the  lungs 
during  the  intervals  between  breaths.  The 
equation  for  the  line  is:  lung  volume  =  (70  X 
body  weight  in  metric  tons)  -  44;  for  which 
r  =  0.94. 


Table    1.  —  Arterial   blood   gas   tensions   and   pH, 
drawn   at    random   during   the   respiratory   cycle. 


Age,  months 
2  5  3  0  10 

55  62  60 

56  69  41 

7  23  7,32  7  35 


Pa02,  mm  Hg 
PaC02,  mm  Hg 
pH 


OXYGEN   CONSUMPTION 


WEIGHT     kg  X   10^ 


WEIGHT     kg  X   lO' 

H 1 1 H 

3  4  5  6 


Figure  7, —  Oxygen  consumption  in  liters/min 
(Vq.,)  in  two  gray  whale  calves,  expressed  as 
a  function  of  body  weight.  The  triangle  rep- 
resents data  from  observations  in  Gigi  I.  The 
regression  equation  tor  the  data  from  Gigi  II 
(circles)  is:  VOj  =  (41  «  body  weight  in 
metric  tons)    -  5.7;  lor  which  r  =  0.96. 


70 

-Po,= 

3  6   lorr 

60- 

.            ^ 

'^  Pco,  = 

16   torr 

50- 

^ 

^^^ 

40- 

^^^ 

' 

30- 

.  Po 

CO2 

20- 

10- 

■ 

Poo, 

1 1 1 

Figure  8. —  Arterial  O2 
and  Cq.,  tensions  (Pao^ 
and  PacOj)  '"  ^  9"* 
wtiale  cal'f,  from  se- 
quential blood  samples 
drawn  about  every  15 
sees  during  five  respira- 
tory cycles. 


so  60  70 


to  85  mm  Hg,  and  the  corresponding 
Pcoo  varied  from  75  to  54  mm  Hg. 
We  computed  wasted  ventilation  from 
the  difference  between  end  tidal  and 
mixed  expired  Pco2-  "  equalled  '3.0 
percent  of  V^  at  age  3  months  and 
13.5  percent  at  age  13  months. 

Arterial  Po2'  ^C02-  ^^^  P^*  ^'^■'^ 
measured  on  three  occasions  in  sam- 
ples drawn  at  random  during  the  res- 
piratory cycle.  (Table  I).  Those  values 
also  varied  considerably:  the  differ- 
ences between  arterial  and  alveolar 
Pq„  and  Pcoo  ^^"^^  difficult  to  inter- 
pret, and  were  sometimes  negative. 
Therefore,  we  measured  blood  gases 
and  pH  in  arterial  blood  drawn  se- 
quentially during  the  respiratory  cy- 
cle (about  every  15  sec);  the  values 
then  varied  systematically  (Figure  8). 

DISCUSSION 

As  we  are  presenting  data  concern- 
ing the  respiratory  and  metabolic 
changes  in  growing  whales,  we  should 
examine  the  hypothesis  that  their  size 
and  rate  of  growth  were  normal. 
There  is  ample  reason  to  raise  the 
question,  for  confined  animals  fed 
contrived  diets  should  always  be  sus- 
pected of  exhibiting  biological  values 
which  would  be  abnormal  for  the 
population  in  nature.  There  are  two 
methods  of  examining  this  question: 
to  make  comparisons  with  other  gray 
whales;  and  to  look  for  internal  evi- 
dence of  abnormal  growth  and  de- 
velopment. 

Data    from    Gilmore    (1961)    and 


Rice  and  Wolman  (1971)  comprise 
the  first  method,  for  they  have  exam- 
ined gray  whale  calves  similar  in  age 
and  size  to  Gigi  II.  Her  weight  and 
length  at  the  time  of  release  compare 
favorably  to  the  other  data  on  calves 
thought  to  be  yearlings  (Figure  3). 
As  gray  whales  in  the  wild  are  thought 
to  fast  during  the  southern  migration 
(Rice  and  Wolman,  1971),  the  obser- 
vation that  Gigi  II  was  slightly  heavy 
for  her  length  should  be  interpreted 
with  caution. 

The  internal  evidence  relating  to 
the  question  consists  of  the  observa- 
tion that  Gigi  II  sustained  an  increase 
in  body  length  which  preceded  any 
considerable  growth  in  body  weight, 
mitigating  against  an  argument  that 
she  was  grossly  overweight  or  overfed, 
and  which  is  consistent  with  the  pat- 
tern of  early  growth  in  other  mammals 
(i.e..  exponential  for  weight  and  linear 
for  length)  (Christian,  1972;  Carlan- 
der  and  Ricker,    1962;  Brody,    1964). 

Although  there  is  some  disagree- 
ment (Gilmore.  196  l.andpers.  comm.). 
newborn  gray  whales  are  estimated  to 
be  4.9  meters  in  length  at  birth  (Rice 
and  Wolman.  1971).  Their  birth- 
weight  is  less  certain,  although  Rice 
proposes  the  weight  of  the  products 
of  conception  at  term  to  be  between 
1.000  and  2.000  kg.  Our  estimates 
of  the  birthweight  of  the  two  whales 
at  about  1.500  kg.  and  the  birthlength 
at  just  under  5  meters  are  therefore 
consistent,  and  permit  extrapolation 
of  their  ages  at  capture  to  4  weeks  for 


Gigi  I  and  10  weeks  for  Gigi  II.  At 
age  1  year.  Gigi  II  had  increased  her 
birthweight  by  about  3.5  fold,  and 
her  birthlength  by  a  little  less  than 
1.5  fold. 

Comparison  of  growth  rates  be- 
tween species  may  be  deceptive  due 
to  species  differences  in  longevity, 
newborn  maturity,  and  adult  body 
size.  However,  since  humans  and 
gray  whales  (Rice  and  Wolman.  1971) 
have  similar  life  spans,  and  are  both 
large  mammals,  it  is  of  interest  to 
consider  their  relative  growth  rates 
in  body  weight,  respiration,  and  me- 
tabolism. 

If  mature  female  gray  whales  are 
13  meters  in  length  (Rice  and  Wol- 
man. 1971;  Scammon.  1874).  and  30 
to  35  thousand  kg  in  weight,  then  the 
newborn  whale  must  increase  its 
birthweight  by  about  20  fold  and  its 
birthlength  by  about  2.5  fold.  The 
fractional  annual  and  ultimate  in- 
creases in  weight  of  the  whales  are 
similar  to  those  in  man.  but  the  frac- 
tional increase  in  length  is  greater 
(Benedict  and  Talbot.  1921). 

Lung  volume  in  human  infants  in- 
creases as  a  cubic  function  of  body 
length  (Cook  and  Hamann.  1961).  a 
satisfying  observation  considering  the 
geometry  involved.  The  regression 
onto  body  weight  is  not  very  reliable; 
the  regression  onto  length  is  approxi- 
mately; Total  Lung  Capacity  (liters) 
=  body  length  (meters)  cubed.  Al- 
though we  have  insufficient  data  for 
the  whale  to  make  firm  conclusions 
(and  have  arbitrarily  linearized  the 
data  against  body  weight  in  Figure  6). 
calculation  of  resting  lung  volume 
against  body  length  suggests  that  an 
equation  of  Lung  Volume  =  0.62  X 
length'  also  fits  the  data.  This  rela- 
tionship seems  reasonable,  as  resting 
lung  volume  in  the  whale  is  probably 
less  than  total  lung  capacity. 

Tidal  volume  and  minute  ventila- 
tion increased  during  the  year's  growth, 
and  as  a  first  approximation,  we  have 
again  linearized  the  data  (Figures  4.5). 
We  recognize  that  changes  in  res- 
piratory function  and  metabolic  rate 
are  probably  not  rectilinear  functions 


of  body  weight,  but  we  also  recognize 
that  the  data  available  to  us  represent 
only  a  small  portion  of  the  full  curves. 
Tidal  volume  increased  about  8  fold 
as  body  weight  tripled:  the  correspond- 
ing value  for  minute  ventilation  was 
10  or  12  fold.  Comparison  of  this 
growth  rate  with  that  of  terrestrial 
mammals  is  awkward,  because  of 
marked  changes  in  their  respiratory 
rate  during  growth  (Watson  and  Low- 
rey.  1962).  while  respiratory  rate  in 
the  whale  was  constant.  In  terrestrial 
mammals,  tidal  volume  changes  as  a 
function  of  lung  volume  (which  in 
turn  varies  as  a  cubic  function  of 
length),  while  minute  ventilation 
changes  as  a  function  of  metabolic 
rate  (Tenney  and  Kemmers.  1963); 
a  more  complex  function  of  growth, 
which  is  not  linear  on  any  conve- 
nient parameter  of  body  size  because 
of  growth  spurts  during  early  and 
late  childhood  (Benedict  and  Talbot. 
1921). 

The  increase  in  the  metabolic  rate 
of  Gigi  II  corresponded  to  the  in- 
crease in  her  ventilation,  and  for  a 
tripling  of  weight,  increased  about  10 
fold.  This  increase  is  of  the  same  order 
as  the  increase  in  human  metabolic 
rate  during  the  first  year  (about  8 
fold)  (Benedict  and  Talbot.  1921). 
and  is  consistent  with  our  general 
impression  that  growth  in  the  whale, 
whether  of  body  weight,  lung  volume, 
or  metabolic  rate,  proceeded  in  paral- 
lel with,  or  only  slightly  more  rapidly 
than,  human  growth. 

Observation  of  animals  at  the  ex- 
tremes of  body  size  invites  inter- 
species comparisons  of  biological 
phenomena.  The  existing  data  for  two 
such  correlations;  of  lung  volume 
with  body  size  (Tenne\  and  Remmers. 
1963),  and  of  metabolic  rate  with 
body  size  (Kleiber.  1961),  are  par- 
ticularly well  organized.  Tenney  has 
shown  that  lung  volume  is  closely 
related  to  body  mass  (over  a  range 
of  body  mass  of  5  orders  of  magni- 
tude) by  the  equation:  log  lung  vol  = 
1.02  log  body  weight  —  1.25,  with 
volume  in  liters  and  weight  in  kg. 
This   yields   a   predicted    lung   volume 


in  Gigi  II  of  410  liters  at  6,150  kg, 
which  corresponds  closely  to  our 
measurement  of  428  liters,  but  which 
diverges  widely  from  values  obtained 
early  in  her  growth.  Tenney  measured 
total  lung  capacity  (TLC)  of  excised 
lungs,  and  we  measured  resting  lung 
volume:  this  ordinarily  considerable 
difference  is  fortuitously  minimized 
by  the  fact  that  resting  lung  volume 
in  the  whale  is  a  larger  fraction  of 
TLC  than  is  the  case  for  terrestrial 
mammals.  This  measurement  permits 
considerable  extension  of  Tenney's 
data,  for  his  largest  animal,  also  a 
cetacean,  weighed  only  1,750  kg. 

Kleiber  studied  the  metabolic  rates 
of  animals  also  differing  in  body  size 
by  about  5  orders  of  magnitude,  and 
concluded  that  metabolic  rate  was 
best  related  to  the  0.75  power  of 
weight,  by  the  equation:  log  A/  =  1.83 
+  (0.756  log  W)  ±0.05,  with  M  in 
kcal/day  and  W  in  kg.  Using  the  con- 
version factor  of  4.8  kcal  =  1  liter 
of  O),  the  whales"  metabolic  rates 
compare  favorably  with  that  regres- 
sion line  up  to  a  body  weight  of  3,000 
kg.  but  diverge  significantly  there- 
after. The  last  metabolic  rate  mea- 
sured was  16.8  l/min.  while  the  cal- 
culated value  from  Kleiber's  equation 
is  6.8  l/min.  It  is  notable  that  metab- 
olism in  Gigi  II.  Benedicts  elephant, 
and  Irving's  whale  all  differ  from 
Kleiber's  prediction,  thereby  raising 
the  question  of  whether  large  mam- 
mals do  indeed  follow  the  0.75  power 
rule.  However,  the  value  for  the 
70.000  kg  fin  whale  was  extrapolated 
from  a  measurement  in  a  porpoise 
(Irving.  Scholander.  and  Grinnell. 
1941).  and  neither  the  elephant  nor 
our  whales  were  studied  under  condi- 
tions meeting  Kleiber's  criteria  of 
ambient  temperature  neutrality,  adult- 
hood, and  basal  postabsortive  state. 
The  resulting  errors  would  be  in  the 
direction  of  the  observed  differences. 
Divergence  from  the  0.75  power  rule 
may  also  be  seen  in  growing  cattle, 
horses,  children,  and  rodents  (Brody. 
1964). 

During  the  phase  of  rapid  weight 
gain.  Gigi   II  ate  from  about    1.200  to 


about  1.800  pounds  of  squid  per  day, 
and  gained  weight  at  the  rate  of 
about  980  kg/mo.  If  we  assume  thai 
squid  are  about  80  percent  water 
and  the  dry  weight  is  equivalent  to  5 
kcal/gm  (R.  Lasker.  pers.  comm.). 
and  make  the  further  assumption  that 
growing  whale  tissue  contains  the 
same  energy  (1.720  kcal/kg  wet 
weight)  as  other  growing  mammalian 
tissue  (Mayer.  1949),  it  is  possible 
to  calculate  the  gross  efficiencies  for 
growth  of  a  baleen  whale  calf  of  10.3 
percent  and  6.9  percent.  Correcting 
for  metabolic  rates  of  11.0  and  16.8 
liters  O'/min  yields  net  efficiencies  for 
growth  of  12.0  percent  and  8.0  per- 
cent (Brody.  1964).  In  general,  growth 
efficiency  is  independent  of  body  size 
(Kleiber.  1947),  but  is  a  diminishing 
function  of  metabolic  age:  the  calculat- 
ed values  are  within  the  expected 
range  for  terrestrial  mammals  beyond 
the  first  doubling  of  body  weight 
(Brody,  1964). 

Tidal  volume  equalled  about  50 
percent  of  resting  lung  volume,  ir- 
respective of  age  or  size.  This  is  a 
smaller  ratio  than  that  reported  for 
other  diving  mammals  (Irving  et  al.. 
1941;  Olsen  et  al..  1969;  Scholander, 
1940),  although  they  were  mature. 
The  ratio  of  wasted  ventilation  to 
tidal  volume  (VjjVj)  in  Gigi  II  was 
about  13  percent,  irrespective  of  age. 
This  value  is  consistent  with  observa- 
tions in  mature  diving  mammals  (Ir- 
ving et  al.,  1941;  Scholander.  1940. 
and  Kooyman.  pers.  comm.).  and  is 
considerably  smaller  than  the  ratio  in 
terrestrial  mammals.  However.  I'j/ 
Vj  diminishes  with  increasing  I'^  in 
humans  and  dogs  (Bouhys.  1964).  a 
pertinent  observation  in  view  of  the 
relatively  large  V^  in  the  divers. 

Fluctuations  in  arterial  Pq  and 
A:02  *''h  respiration  have  been  pre- 
dicted in  man  and  terrestrial  animals 
(Otis.  1964;  Suwa  and  Bendizen.  1972) 
and  diving  animals  (Irving  et  al..  194  I). 
Those  fluctuations  are  influenced  by: 
1)  the  relative  sizes  of  the  tidal  and 
resting  lung  volumes;  2)  the  relation- 
ship between  resting  lung  volume  and 
metabolic    rate;    3)    the    relationship 


between  the  fluctuating  pulmonary 
blood  flow  and  the  fluctuating  alveolar 
gas  composition  (Otis,  1964):  and  4) 
the  solubility  of  respiratory  gases  in 
pulmonary  tissue.  The  greatest  differ- 
ences we  observed  were  A/'og  =  36 
mm  Hg  and  A/coo  ~  '^  "^^n  Hg 
(Figure  8):  These  considerable  excur- 
sions follow  from  the  ratio  of  resting 
lung  volume  to  tidal  volume,  which 
in  the  whale  is  about  2  and  in  man 
about  5;  the  ratio  of  resting  lung 
volume  to  metabolic  rate,  which  in 
the  whale  is  about  20  and  in  man  is 
about  10;  and  the  very  large  differ- 
ence between  human  and  whale  res- 
piratory rates.  Taken  together,  these 
relationships  suggest  that  apneustic 
breathing  in  the  whale  is  just  as  it 
seems:  each  breath  interrupts  a  res- 
piratory pause  which  actually  repre- 
sents a  period  of  breathholding,  dur- 
ing which  appropriate  changes  occur 
in  arterial  blood  gas  tensions.  Al- 
though tempting,  approaches  toward 
cardiac  output  computation  are  ham- 
pered by  ignorance  of  the  composition 
of  mixed  venous  blood.  Calculations 
of  the  "mean"  alveolar  gas  or  arterial 
blood  composition  are  similarly  ham- 
pered, and  by  imprecision  in  the 
sample  collection  timing  as  well. 

CONCLUSIONS 

1.  These  two  gray  whale  calves 
have  provided  the  first  opportunity 
for  the  collection  of  physiologic  data 
from  living  baleen  whales.  The  growth- 
rate  in  one  of  them  was  such  that  she 
became  the  world's  largest  captive 
animal. 

2.  Comparison  of  their  size  with 
that  of  whales  in  nature,  and  of  their 
growthrate  with  one  another  and  with 
other  animals,  strongly  suggests  that 
their  size  and  growthrate  were  normal. 

3.  We  observed  increases  in  res- 
piratory function  and  metabolism 
during  growth  similar  to  the  increases 
in  terrestrial  mammals.  In  particular: 
relative  increases  in  body  weight:  and 
of  lung  volume,  minute  ventilation, 
and  metabolic  rate  as  functions  of 
body    weight,    proceeded    in    approxi- 


mate parallel  to  the  relative  increases 
observed  in  man, 

4.  Interspecies  comparisons  of  ab- 
solute lung  volume  and  metabolic 
rate  can  also  be  based  on  body  weight. 
Where  the  gray  whale  calves  differed 
from  correlations  drawn  between  mam- 
mals including  those  at  the  extremes 
of  body  size,  the  departure  could  be 
explained  by  the  whales'  immaturity. 

5.  One  of  the  whales  entered  a 
rapid  growth  phase,  during  which  it 
gained  approximately  1,000  kg/mo. 
Its  gross  efficiency  for  growth,  cal- 
culated from  the  amount  it  ate  and 
weighed,  diminished  from  about  10 
percent  at  a  body  weight  of  about 
3,000  kg  to  about  7  percent  at  a  body 
weight  of  6,350  kg. 

6.  The  relationships  between  tidal 
volume,  resting  lung  volume,  and 
wasted  ventilation  are  similar  in  the 
gray  whale  calf  to  these  in  other  div- 
ing mammals:  although  those  rela- 
tionships are  different  from  the  ones 
in  terrestrial  animals,  they  follow 
from  the  apneustic  respiratory  pat- 
tern (of  infrequent  but  very  large 
breaths  interrupting  long  periods  of 
breathholding   at    high    lung   volume). 

7.  The  apneustic  pattern  of  breath- 
ing also  results  in  respiratory  excur- 
sions in  arterial  oxygen  and  carbon 
dioxide  tensions  much  larger  than 
those  predicted  in  terrestrial  mammals. 

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS 

Both  whales  were  kept  in  pools  at 
Sea  World,  Inc.,  an  oceanarium  in 
San  Diego,  Calif.  The  staff  and  ad- 
ministration extended  to  investiga- 
tors courtesies  and  facilities  both 
large  and  small,  ranging  from  hot 
showers  and  coffee  to  underwriting 
the  expeditions  and  the  subsequent 
upkeep  of  the  whales:  and  thereby 
made  these  studies  both  possible  and 
enjoyable.  In  particular.  Bud  Dona- 
hoo  and  Sue  Bailey  provided  Gigi  II 
and  her  investigators  with  under- 
standing and  with  expert  assistance. 
We  acknowledge  with  thanks  the  sup- 
port of  Robert  Peterson  and  the  crew 
of  the  FiilcDii  involved  in  the  capture. 


transport,  and  maintenance  of  Gigi  I. 
We  are  also  grateful  for  the  consider- 
able assistance  of  Jack  Schultz,  Ken 
Hamai,  James  Wright.  Brian  D'  Aoust, 
and  Morgan  Wells.  Finally,  we  are 
grateful  to  the  two  Gigis,  for  they,  by 
patiently  enduring  our  several  insults, 
made  possible  observations  new  to 
the  largest  and  least  accessible  sub- 
order of  living  mammals. 


LITERATURE  CITED 

Benedict,  F.  G.,  and  F.  B.  Talbot.  1921. 
Metabolism  and  growth  from  birth  to 
puberty.  Carnegie  Inst.  Wash.,  Publ.  No. 
302,  Wash.,  D.C. 

Bouhvs,  A.  1964.  Respiratory  dead  space. 
In  W.  O.  Fenn  and  H.  Rahn  (editors). 
Handbook  of  phvsiologv.  Respiration,  Sect. 
3.  Vol.  1,  p.  699-714.  Am.  Physiol.  Soc, 
Wash.,  D.C. 

Brody,  S.  1964.  Bioenergetics  and  growth. 
Hafner,  New  York. 

Carlander,  K.  D.,  and  W.  E.  Ricker.  1962. 
Postnatal  vertebrate  development.  In  P.  L. 
Altman  and  D.  S.  Dittmer  (editors). 
Growth,  p.  33.V378.  Fed.  Am.  Soc.  Exp. 
Biol.,  Wash.,  DC. 

Christian,  I..  L.,  L.  N.  Hazel,  J.  P.  Scott,  M. 
Shelton,  G.  M.  Sidwell.  N.  R.  Ellis,  W.  W. 
Swett.  G.  S.  Templeton.  and  G.  Van 
Wagener.  1972.  Growth:  Mammals  other 
than  man.  In  P.  L.  Altman  and  D.  S.  Ditt- 
mer (editors).  Biol,  data  book.  p.  207-216. 
Fed.  Am.  Soc.  Exp.  Biol.,   Bethcsda.  Md. 

Cook,  C.  D.,  and  J.  F.  Hamann.  1961.  Rela- 
tion of  lung  volumes  to  height  in  healthy 
persons  between  the  ages  of  .S  and  38 
years.  J.  Ped.  59:710-714. 

Gilmore,  R.  M.  1961,  The  story  of  the  gray 
whale.  2nd  ed.  Privately  publ.,  San  Diego, 
16  p. 

Irving,  L.,  P.  F.  Scholander,  and  S.  W.  Grin- 
nell.  1941.  The  respiration  of  the  porpoise, 
Tiirsuip.'i  irunciilii.s.  J.  Cell.  Comp.  Physiol. 
17:14.5-168. 

Kleiber,  M.  1947.  Body  size  and  metabolic 
rate.  Physiol.  Rev.  27:5  1 1-541. 

.  1961.  The  fire  of  life.  An  introduc- 
tion to  animal  energetics.  John  Wiley  & 
Sons,  Inc..  New  York,  454  p. 

Mayer,  J.  1949.  Gross  efficiency  of  growth 
of  the  rat  as  a  simple  mathematical  func- 
tion of  lime.  Yale  J.  Biol.  Med.  21:415-419. 

Olsen,  C.  R.,  R.  Eisner,  F.  C.  Hale,  and 
D.  W.  Kenney.  1969.  -Blow'  of  the  pilot 
whale.  Science  163:953-955. 

Olsen,  C.  R.,  F.  C.  Hale,  and  R.  Eisner.  1969. 
Mechanics  of  venlilalion  in  the  pilot  whale. 
Resp.  Physiol.  7:137-149. 

Otis,  A.  B.  1964.  Quantitative  relationships 
in  steady-state  gas  exchange.  In  W.  O. 
Fenn  and  H.  Rahn  (editors).  Handbook  of 
physiology.  Respiration.  Sect.  4,  Vol,  1. 
p.  '681-698.  Am.  Phvsiol.  Soc,  Wash.,  D.C. 

Rice,  D.  W.,  and  A.  A.  Wolman.  1971.  The 
life  history  and  ecology  of  the  gray  whale 
(Eschruhiiiis  robt4snis).  Am.  Soc.  Mammal., 
142  p. 

Scammon,  C.  M.  1874.  The  marine  mammals 
of  (he  North-western  coast  of  North 
America.  John  H.  Carmany  and  Co.,  San 
Francisco,  319  p. 

Scholander,  P.  F.  1940.  Experimental  inves- 
tigation of  the  respiratory  function  in  divid- 
ing mammals  and  birds.  Hvairad.  Skr. 
22:1-131. 


8 


Suwa,  K.,  and  H.  H.  Bendixen.  \912.  Pul- 
monary gas  exchange  in  a  tidally  ventilat- 
ed single  alveolus  model.  J.  Appl.  Phvsiol. 
32:834-841. 


Tenney,  S.  M.,  and  J,  E.  Remmers.  1463. 
Comparative  quantitative  morphology  of 
the  mammalian  lung:  diffusion  area. 
Nature  197:54-56. 


Watson,  F..  H.,  and  G.  H.  Lowrey.  1962. 
Growth  and  development  of  children.  4th 
ed..  Year  Book  Medical  Publishers.  Inc., 
Chicago,  384  p. 


MFR  Paper  1045.  From  Marine  Fisheries  Review,  Vol. 
36,  No.  4.  April  1974.  Copies  of  this  paper.  In  limited 
numbers,  are  available  from  D83.  Tec  finical  Information 
Division,  Environmental  Science  Information  Center. 
NCAA,  Washington,  DC  20235. 


MFR  PAPER  1046 

Ballistocardiography  as  a  Technique 
for  Comparative  Physiology 

N.  TY  SMITH  and  ERIC  A.  WAHRENBROCK 

ABSTRACT 

The  ultra  low-frequency  haUistocarttioi^rcini  was  recorded  on  a  young  Califor- 
nia gray  whale.  The  tracing  /.v  remarkably  similar  to  those  obtained  from  man 
and  mouse,  both  in  amplitude  and  in  form.  The  IJ  amplitudes  fr>r  mouse,  man. 
and  whale  were  2.6,  4,3,  ami  4.6  cntlsec'-.  We  conclude  that  greater  differences 
are  caused  by  poor  recording  technique  or  by  disease  than  by  species  differences. 
The  major  interspecies  differences  were  seen  in  the  timing  of  cardiac  events, 
such  as  preejeclion  or  ejection  time.  These  differences  could  be  caused  by 
differences  in  heart  size. 


The  ballistocardiograph  (Beg)  is  a 
device  for  evaluating  the  mechanical 
function  of  the  heart.  It  has  been 
recorded  in  an  incredible  array  of 
animals,  ranging  from  egg  embryos  to 
cattle.  One  of  the  more  interesting 
facts  to  arise  from  these  recordings 
is  that  the  tracings  are  remarkably 
similar  among  species,  particularly 
mammals.  This  similarity  holds  both 
in  form  and  in  amplitude.  It  was 
therefore  an  excellent  opportunity  to 


N.  Ty  Smith  is  an  Associate 
Professor  of  Anesthesia  at  the 
University  of  California  at  San 
Diego,  Veterans  Administration 
Hospital,  San  Diego,  CA  92161, 
and  Eric  A.  Wahrenbrock  is  an 
Assistant  Professor  of  Anesthesia 
at  the  University  of  California, 
San  Diego, 


extend  these  observations  to  Gigi, 
an  animal  with  an  entirely  different 
mass  and  configuration  from  other 
mammals  previously  used. 

The  Beg  records  the  movements 
of  the  body  caused  by  movements  of 
blood  in  the  body.  First  recorded  in 
1887.  the  Beg  has  undergone  a  series 
of  ups  and  downs  in  its  attempts  to 
become  a  useful  tool  for  measuring 
cardiovascular  function  noninvasively. 
Not  until  the  1950"s  when  physicists 
and  engineers  entered  the  held,  did  the 
Beg  finally  re-emerge  as  an  accurate, 
relatively  simple  technique. 

Essentially,  the  Beg  works  on  the 
principle  that  an  attempted  shift  in  the 
center  of  mass  of  a  floating  body  is 
compensated  for  by  a  movement  of  the 
body  in  the  opposite  direction,  so  that 
the  center  of  mass  remains  constant  in 


relation  to  a  fixed  point.  Thus,  if  blood 
moves  in  one  direction  after  ejection 
by  the  left  ventricle,  the  body  will 
move  in  the  opposite  direction.  These 
movements  are  quite  small,  but  the 
reader  has  certainly  noticed  a  slight 
bodily  movement  as  he  lies  quietly 
on  a  bed  or  a  slight  movement  of 
the  pointer  on  a  weighing  scale,  each 
movement  synchronous  with  the 
heart  beat.  This  minute  body  move- 
ment can  be  recorded  as  displace- 
ment, velocity,  or  acceleration.  Figure 
1  shows  examples  of  normal  tracings 
in  man.  The  important  fact  to  note 
is  that  the  major  components  of  the 
Beg  occur  during  ejection  of  blood, 
particularly  during  the  early  portion. 


METHODS 

When  the  physical  scientists  entered 
the  field,  they  laid  down  certain 
standards  for  recording  the  Beg, 
standards  which  were  to  convert  bal- 
listocardiography from  a  haphazard 
technique  to  a  precise  one.  The  first 
requirement  is  that  a  very  light  bed 
is  necessary,  in  contrast  to  the  heavy 
ones  formerly  used.  A  ratio  of  10:1 
for  subjectibed  is  minimal.  Second, 
coupling,  or  binding,  of  subject  to  bed 
must  be  as  tight  as  possible.  Third. 
coupling  to  ground  must  be  minimal, 
so  that  ambient  vibrations  can  be 
attenuated.  The  Beg  is  an  extremely 
sensitive  instrument.  Peak  displace- 
ment is  about  \00iJ.  peak  acceleration, 
a  few  millig"s.  g  being  the  accelera- 
tion of  gravity.  With  older  instruments, 
vibrations  from  a  truck  outside  the 
building  were  able  to  destroy  a  bal- 


Phono 


EKG 


Rl    Hfort 


listocardiographic  recording.  Finally, 
the  natural  frequency  of  the  entire 
system  should  be  as  low  as  possible — 
0.3  Hz  or  less  is  mandatory.  These 
four  requirements  imply  that  the  ideal 
Beg  system  is  one  in  which  subject 
and  bed  tloat  as  a  unit  in  space. 

Several  ingenious  systems,  some 
simple,  some  complex,  have  been 
assembled  to  accomplish  the  above 
requirements.  Beds  have  been  con- 
structed from  aluminum  and  canvas, 
styrofoam.  balsa,  or  aluminum  honey- 


comb, and  suspended  by  wires  or 
floated  on  mercury  or  air.  The  sim- 
plest and  original  bed  is  based  on  the 
pendulum,  and  was  the  type  used  in 
this  stud\ .  The  Beg  bed  was  the  same 
stretcher  used  to  weigh  Gigi  (Figure  2). 
The  stretcher  was  constructed  from 
canvas  and  two  20-fool  heavy  wall, 
galvanized  steel  pipes  3  inches  in 
diameter.  The  total  weight  of  227  kg 
may  seem  large  to  most  ballisto- 
cardiographers.  but  Gigi's  weight  at 
the  time  was  4..'i00  kg.  and  the  whale: 


Figure  1.  —  Examples  of  normal  ballistocardio- 
graphic tracings  in  man.  From  top  to  bottom 
are  recorded  acceleration  (A),  velocity  (V). 
and  displacement  (D).  In  addition,  the  EKG 
and  the  major  events  of  the  cardiac  cycle  are 
given  as  reference  points.  (From  Scarborough 
et  al..  Am.  J.  Cardiol.  2:613-641.  1958.) 


bed  ratio  of  20;  1  was  more  than 
adequate.  Six  ropes  supported  the 
poles,  four  at  the  ends,  each  13  feet 
in  length,  and  two  in  the  middle.  A 
board  inserted  between  the  two  middle 
ropes  prevented  injury  to  the  animal. 
The  six  ropes  were  suspended  by  a 
single  cable  from  a  crane.  During  the 
recording  the  cable  was  7'/2  meters 
from  pulley  to  hook,  giving  a  natural 
frequency  of  about  0.18  Hz.  The 
crane  was  part  of  a  truck  hoist,  which 
was  ideal  for  isolation  from  ground 
because  of  the  pneumatic  lift  and 
the  rubber  tires. 

Most  of  the  water  was  drained  from 
Gigi's  tank  to  reduce  her  mobility  and 
to  enhance  our  own.  She  was  reluctant 
to  lie  on  the  bed.  and  had  to  be  coaxed. 
The  coaxing  process  took  45  minutes. 
Once  on  the  bed.  she  became  surpris- 
ingly quiet,  which  was  fortunate, 
since  she  could  easil\  have  demolished 
our  fragile  accelerometer.  One  re- 
adjustment of  the  relative  position  of 
whale  and  bed  was  required  to  level 
the  bed. 

Acceleration  was  transduced  in 
the  head-foot  direction  with  an 
Endevco'  piezo-resistive  accelerometer 
clamped  to  one  of  the  steel  poles  with 
a  large  C  clamp.  The  accelerometer 
was  calibrated  with  a  pendulum,  ac- 
cording to  the  method  of  Moss  (1961). 
Lead  two  of  the  ECG  was  recorded 
using  4  inch  18  g  spinal  needles.  All 
electrical  cables  were  supported  by  a 
rope  stretched  across  the  tank.  A  60  Hz 
passive  notch  filter  and  a  .^d  Hz 
low  pass  Butterworth  filter  were  used 
on  both  the  ECG  and  Beg  to  eliminate 
unwanted  noise  and  at  the  same  time 
preserve  timing  relations.  Data  were 
recorded  on  a  Hewlett-Packard  oscil- 
loscope and  an  Ampex  FM  tape  rec- 
order. 


'Use  of  trade  names  in  this  publication  does 
not  imply  endorsement  of  commercial  products 
by      \he      National      f^arine      Fisheries      Service. 


10 


RESULTS 

Figure  3  shows  the  Beg  recorded 
from  Gigi.  In  amplitude  and  form,  it 
is  similar  to  that  seen  in  man.  Figure 
4  demonstrates  that  the  inlluence  of 
ventilation  on  the  tracing  is  profound. 
In  fact,  during  expiration  and  in- 
spiration reading  the  Beg  is  impossible. 

Figure  5  displays  the  Begs  of 
three  animals — a  mouse,  a  man.  and  a 
whale.  Their  similarities  are  more 
striking  than  their  differences.  This 
similarity  holds  in  spite  of  differences 
in  body  mass  and  form,  amount  and 
distribution  of  fat.  and  natural 
environment. 

Table  1  lists  some  measurements 
derived  from  the  Bcg's  of  the  mouse, 
man.  and  a  whale.  It  also  gives  some 
fundamental  values  which  are  helpful 
in  comparing  the  species. 

The  Beg  has  been  used  to  estimate 
cardiac  output  and  stroke  volume  in 
several  species.  By  using  the  Starr 
formula  (Starr  and  Noordergraaf. 
1967.  p.  177- 180)  we  estimated  Gigi's 
stroke  volume  to  be  7.2  I.  and  the 
cardiac  output  as  .^08  1/min  (Table  I). 

DISCUSSION 

One  of  the  major  postulated  objec- 
tions to  the  Beg  is  that  the  amount 
and  distribution  of  body  fat  can  con- 
siderably alter  the  recording.  This 
did  not  seem  to  be  the  ease  in  Gigi. 
in  spite  of  a  3' 2  inch  layer  of 
blubber.  It  is  true  that  the  old  direct- 
body  Beg  used  in  the  1950's  was 
subject  to  influence  by  body  fat.  How- 
ever, the  ultra  low-frequency  bed.  by 
virtue  of  its  light  weight  and  strong 
coupling  between  subject  and  bed. 
has  eliminated  most  of  this  inaccuracy. 
The  fundamental  natural  frequency 
of  the  body  ("bowl  of  jelly"  phenom- 
enon alluded  to  by  some  in  refer- 
ence to  the  Beg)  does  not  depend  on 
bod\  mass,  amount  of  fat.  or  age 
(Burger.  Noordergraaf.  and  Ver- 
hagen.  1953;  Burger  and  Noorder- 
graaf. 1956;  Talbot  and  Harrison. 
1955;  Tannenbaum.  Vessell.  and 
Schaek.  1956;  Weissbaek.  1960a. 
1960b;    Tischenko.     1963).    Some    of 


Figure  2.  —  Gigi.  Beg  bed.  man.  and  hoist.  The  accelerometer  is  being  attached  to  the  right  side 
of  the  proximal  pole.  The  truck  was  jammed  against  the  retaining  wall  of  the  tank.  A  white  rope 
strung  across  the  tank  supports  the  cables. 


the  higher  mode  frequencies  may 
depend  on  the  amount  and  distribu- 
tion of  body  fat. 

A  crucial  factor  in  ballistocardiog- 
raphy is  the  orientation  of  the  aorta 
in  relation  to  the  body.  This  is  so 
because  usually  complexities  have 
forced    ballistocardiographers    to 


record  the  Beg  in  one  dimension,  the 
head-foot  direction,  instead  of  the 
possible  three  dimensions  and  six 
degrees  of  freedom.  Thus  if  the 
direction  of  ejection  and  runoff  is 
different  in  different  species,  the  com- 
parison would  be  difficult.  The  orienta- 
tion   of    the    aorta    seems    to    be    no 


11 


ECG  -n 


ULFBcq^ 


TIME 


r^ 


,'* — ^ 


•  ,o„  — ^  1^  ^^  '~\  — ^ '~',       ■  f"',  — ^  f~\  — ^  r-\ 


J^   V/vJ^  \  .      f^ 


^^^v^^W'-'V 


Figure  3.  —  ECG   lead  two  and  acceleration  Beg  in  a  California  gray  whale.  Paper  speed    -    50  mm/ 
sec.  The  Beg  calibration  of  3  cm/sec-  is  shown  in  the  lower  right. 


ECG-n  '~';—.^ ';—'!' — ^/'~^(^~^,'-^^ — """f^' — "^  r~\'"~^  f'l^  f-\ '^r-^^«*-  /,-^'^~~-^'' — '^r^''~~^r~^'' — ",'"'■ 


ULF  Bcqo 

TIME 


^^AJ';U\wA^wvA^\^;'vvv';V^     ■  ,^     ,  /. v^^v'^'"'^'-'^^ 


.  J        «v 


Figure  4.  —  The  Beg  with  Gigi  during  one  breath.  Paper  speed  =  25  mm/sec.  The  respiratory 
influence  on  the  Beg  is  considerably  greater  in  the  whale  than  other  species.  This  is  probably  due 
to  the  necessarily  rapid  and  large  tidal  exchange. 


MOUSE 

An  17.25.  R  I9h,    27.04g  .  16.8.68 


,v— Av-v^/W-^^i^V^^ 


2cm 


-lO.lmV 


MAN 


ULF  Be 


q„  A^v^/yA^~^YV-^YV-'Y^  ^ 


ECG-n- 


WHALE 


ECG-n 


ULF  Bcg„ 


TIME 


-V^^ — \^^ — V-^ 


3cm 
sec  2 


Figure  5.  —  The  ultra  low-frequency  acceleration  Bcg's  in  a  27-gm  mouse  (top  record),  a  73.000-gm 
man  (middle  record),  and  a  4.S00.000-gm  whale  (lower  record).  The  ECG  s  are  also  shown.  Note 
the  more  rapid  paper  speed  in  the  mouse  Beg.  Considering  the  167.000-fold  difference  m  body 
mass,  as  well  as  the  differences  in  body  shape,  amount  and  distribution  of  fat.  and  instrumentation, 
the  records  are  remarkably  similar.  The  mouse  Beg  is  from  Juznic.  G.,  Bibl.  Cardiol.  26:281-291.  1970. 
The  human  Beg  is  courtesy  of  Dr.  Aaron  G.  Dinaburg. 


different  in  the  whale  from  other 
mammals.  Green  (1971)  describes  the 
course  and  relations  thus:  "Leaving  the 
left  ventricle,  the  aorta  makes  the 
characteristic  left  arch  before  passing 
superficially  and  caudally  to  lie  just 
under  the  center  of  the  thoracic 
cavity  to  pass  through  the  diaphragm." 

Body  acceleration,  which  is  closely 
related  to  blood  acceleration,  is  a 
constant  factor  among  various  mam- 
malian species.  A  peak-to-peak  body 
acceleration  of  2.5-5  cm/sec-  (about 
2.5-5  millig)  seems  to  be  optimum.  If 
the  acceleration  is  greater,  as  with 
severe  aortic  insufficiency,  the  slight 
motion  now  becomes  quite  noticeable. 
If  the  whale's  body  acceleration  were 
proportionateK  large  in  relation  to  its 
mass,  the  motion  could  become  un- 
comfortable. Why  a  smaller  normal 
acceleration  would  not  be  feasible,  or 
indeed  why  an  initial  ventricular 
impulse  is  necessary  at  all.  is  difficult 
to  guess. 

Other  constants  occur  among 
mammals.  For  example,  with  rare 
exceptions  such  as  the  giraffe,  arterial 
blood  pressure  is  very  similar  in  differ- 
ent species  (Altman  and  Dittmer. 
197  1.  p.  405-4(18).  One  could  spec- 
ulate why  these  values  are  so  appro- 
priate. If  normal  arterial  pressure  were 
higher,  either  the  vessel  walls  would 
have  to  be  of  considerably  stiffcr 
material,  or  the\  would  have  to  be 
so  thick  that  the  ratio  of  wall  thick- 
ness to  lumen  would  be  impractical. 
If  normal  pressure  were  lower,  perfu- 
sion through  the  necessarily  small 
capillary  vessels  would  be  diflicult. 
Perhaps  even  more  pertinent  a  con- 
stant involves  the  relative  masses  of 
the  heart  and  body  in  different  mam- 
mals (Table  1).  Apparently  there  is 
more  variation  within  species  than 
among  species. 

The  general  form  o\  Gigis  Beg  is 
very  similar  to  that  given  for  normal 
man  h\  .Scarborough  et  al.  (  1958).  One 
can  certainly  recognize  an  HIJ  ci>m- 
plex  and  an  LMN  complex.  It  seems 
that  greater  differences  in  amplitude 
and  lorni  are  caused  by  faulty  tech- 
nique, such  as  a  heavy  bed  and  poor 


12 


coupling,  or  by  disease  states,  than  by 
differences  in  species.  Figure  6  gives 
an  example  of  this.  It  compares  a 
virtually  normal  Beg  in  a  dog  with  the 
Beg  in  a  dog  at  the  terminal  stages  of 
rejection.  The  latter  tracing  is  obvious- 
ly grossly  abnormal  and  demonstrates 
the  extreme  in  Beg  abnormality. 
Other  conditions  which  can  cause  a 
greater  ballistocardiographic  variation 
within  than  among  species  include 
anginal  attacks,  severe  coronary 
artery  disease.  hyperthyroidism. 
aortic  valvular  insufficiency,  and 
congestive  heart  failure  (Starr  and 
Noordergraaf.  1967).  Even  a  pro- 
gram of  physical  conditioning  over 
several  months  can  alter  an  individual's 
Beg  to  as  great  an  extent  as  the  differ- 
ences seen  among  species  (Elsbach 
et   al.,    1970,    Holloszy   et   al..    1964). 

The  major  difference  among  the 
Bcg"s  of  various  mammals  seems  to  be 
one  of  timing  of  the  systolic  wave 
forms.  As  body  size  increases,  the  on- 
set of  the  systolic  complex  is  delayed 
(QH  interval)  and  the  complex  spreads 
out  (HJ  and  HI.  intervals.  Table  1). 
If  we  consider  the  tip  of  the  H  wave 
as  the  onset  of  ejection,  we  shall  at 
worst  slightly  underestimate  ihe 
cardiac  pre-ejection  period.  Certainly 
the  relative  values  among  species  can 
be  estimated  by  the  QH  interval.  Sim- 
ilarly, ejection  time  can  be  estimated 
by  the  HL  interval.  This  interval  did 
not  seem  to  be  so  relatively  prolonged 
in  Gigi  as  the  QH.  The  contribution 
of  prolonged  conduction  time  in 
hearts  of  different  sizes  to  the  inter- 
species differences  in  systolic  time 
intervals  is  probabK  considerable,  as 
is  shown  b\  the  PR  and  QRS  intervals 
in  Table  1 . 

In  general,  heart  rate  and  ejection 
time  are  inversely  related.  Thus  part 
of  the  differences  in  systolic  time 
intervals  is  due  to  heart  rate  differ- 
ences. But  heart  rate  cannot  explain 
all  of  the  differences.  Gigi's  heart 
rate  of  43  beats/min  was  not  as  slow 
as  expected  and  occurred  presumably 
because  she  was  excited.  An  athlete 
with  a  heart  rate  of  40-45  beats/min 
does    not    show     the    prolonged    pre- 


Table  1. — Some  comparative  values  among  mouse,  man,  and  whale. 


Weight  (gm) 
Length  (cm) 
Heart/body  mass 

(gm/100  gm) 
Heart  rate  (beats/mm) 
Beg  IJ  amplitude 

(cm/sec-) 
Beg  IJ  amplitude 

(corrected,  cm/sec^) 
Bog  IJ  amplitude 

(dynes) 
Cardiac  output  (l/min) 
Cardiac  index 

(Ml/mm/kg) 
Stroke  volume  (ml) 
Stroke  index  (ml/kg) 
PR  interval  (msec) 
QRS  interval  (msec) 
QH  interval  (msec) 

"Pre-eiection  period" 
HJ  interval  (msec) 
HL  interval  (msec) 

"Election  time" 


-t- With  tail 

■  Corrected  for  mass  of  bed    IJ 

=  Measured  in  Gigi 

I  Walker,  et  al  ,  1968 

-  Altman  and  Dittmer,  1971,  p.  240, 

'  Altman  and  Dittmer,  1971,  p.  236-7 

^  Altman  and  Dittmer,  1971,  p.  239. 


Mouse 

Man 

Whale 

Ratio 
Whale/Mouse 

27 

6  5-9.5  (12  5-20)   +   ( 

0  41-0  51  (■-) 

73.000 
)                180 
0  44-0  57(3) 

4,500.000 

760 
0  32-0  50(r) 

167,000 

38-117 

0.78-0  98 

300-700  (■•) 
2.6(6) 

60-80 
4  3(6) 

43 
48 

0.13 
1.8 

3.4- 

4.7- 

50- 

1.5 

73.0 

250  X  ^o■■'  (;.») 

2  27X  lOr 

311.000 

— 

5.0-8  0 
70-90  (9.111) 

308 
68.4 

— 

42(") 

22(11) 

27 

70-90  (9..I") 

0  9-1  2  (9.11) 

180-200 

80-100 

90-110  ('.») 

7150 

1.6 

294"  (320)  (") 

103'  (90-120)  (It) 

320 

70 
12.9 
11.9 

43 
64 

140  ('.8) 
320  ('.«) 

205 
490 

4.8 
7.7 

/Tota!Mass\  :!    '^"-"''^-"  ^"t°""^^^'  ^^^^'  "    3"° 

I  p„^,   ..,,,  I  '■    Juznic.  1970 

VBody  Massy  .    Starr  and  Noordergraaf,  1967. 

«    IVloss.  1961 
9   Cullen,  et  al  .  1970. 
I"  Altman  and  Dittmer,  1971,  p.  323- 
"  Altman  and  Dittmer,  1971,  p.  278. 


ECG 


n    4- 1 1 1 1- 1— 


ULF  BCGa   '-wU  ^"^-^-ni|  Vjw. 


',yv-%AA^,^, 


PG 


Timo.   In   seconds 


Figure   6a.  —   These   (wo   tracings   are   from   a   conscious   dog   after  cardiac  autotransplantation.   The 
Beg  is  essentially  normal.  PG  =  Pneumogram  (Whitney  gauge). 


ECG-n 


ULF  BCGa 


-!^^-- 


^-A-.v^->V' 


PG 


Time     in    seconds 


Figure  6b.  —  These  tracings  are  from  a  dog  in  the  terminal  stages  ol  rejection  after  cardiac  allo- 
transplantation. The  difference  between  the  ballistocardiographic  records  from  the  two  dogs  is 
obviously  greater  than  that  between  Ihe  tracings  from  a  whale  and  mouse  (Figure  5). 


13 


ejection  period  and  ejection  time  that 
Gigi  does  (Weissler  et  al..  I960; 
Leighton  et  al..  1971). 

We  said  that  the  Beg  is  used  to 
estimate  cardiac  function.  This  is 
possible  because  of  the  close  relation- 
ship between  the  acceleration  Beg  and 
the  acceleration  of  blood  out  of  the 
left  ventricle  into  the  aorta  (Winter 
et  al..  1966,  1967:  Smith.  Van  Citters, 
and  Verdouw.  1970;  Deuchar.  1966). 
The  latter  is  a  proven  sensitive  indi- 
cator of  cardiac  function  (Noble. 
Trenchard.  and  Guz.  1966;  Noble, 
Gabe.  and  Trenchard.  1967;  Rushmer. 
1964.  1970). 

Gigi's  stroke  index  of  1.6  ml/kg 
is  somewhat  greater  than  that  of  man. 
about  1  ml/kg.  However,  since  the 
heart  rate  was  slower  in  Gigi,  the 
cardiac  index  was  closer  to  that  of 
man  (Table  1).  Again,  in  comparing 
several  species,  we  note  that  when 
cardiac  output  is  plotted  against  body 
weight  on  a  log-log  scale,  a  straight 
line  is  obtained  (Altman  and  Dittmer, 
1971,  p.  320).  It  does  seem  reason- 
able that  stroke  inde.x  is  roughly 
equivalent  in  different  mammals,  since 
the  heart/body  mass  ratios  are  similar. 

Although  the  measurement  of 
acceleration,  as  opposed  to  displace- 
ment or  velocity,  minimizes  the  in- 
fluence of  ventilation,  any  movement 
or  muscular  activity  can  disturb  the 
recording.  Since  whales  must  expire 
and  inspire  rapidly  between  dives, 
the  muscular  activity  is  relatively 
violent.  As  Wahrenbrock  has 
measured.  Gigi's  peak  instantaneous 
flow  rate  was  285  1/sec.  Thus 
ventilation  demolished  Gigi's  Beg 
recording.  Fortunately,  ventilatory 
rate  was  extremely  slow  so  that  the 
Beg  had  sufficient  time  to  recover 
between  breaths. 

The  Beg  has  now  been  recorded 
in  a  wider  range  of  masses  in  animals 
than  any  other  physiologic  test.  The 
mass  ratio  is  1;6, 000.000.  egg  embryo: 
whale.  This  points  out  the  versatility 
of  the  Beg  and  suggests  its  importance 
as  a  technique  for  comparative 
physiological  and  pharmacological 
studies. 


ACKNOWLEDGMENTS 

The  authors  wish  to  acknowledge 
the  invaluable  assistance  of  Gary 
Maruschak.  They  also  thank  the 
staff  of  Sea  World  who  participated 
in  this  study.  Without  their  enthusi- 
astic cooperation,  these  studies  would 
have  been  impossible. 

LITERATURE  CITED 

AUman.  P.  L.,  .ind  D.  S.  Dittmer  (editors). 
1971.  Respiration  and  circulation.  Fed. 
Am.    Soc.    E,\p.    Biol..    Bcthescda.    4tO    p. 

Burger.  H.  C.  and  A.  Noordergraaf. 
19?6.  Physical  basis  of  ballistocardiography. 
IF  The  quanties  that  can  be  measured 
with  ditferent  types  of  ballistocardiographs 
and  their  mutual  relations.  Am.  Heart 
J.  5  1:127-139. 

Burger.  H.  C.  A.  Noordergraaf.  and  A.  M. 
W.  Verhagen.  1953.  Physical  basis  of 
the  low-fretiuencv  ballistocardiograph. 
Am.  Heart  J.  46:71-83, 

Cullen.  B.  F..  E.  F  Eger.  II.  N.  T.  Smith, 
D.  C.  Sawyer.  G.  A.  Gregory,  and  T.  A. 
Joas.  1970.  Cardiovascular  effects  of 
fluroxene  in  man.  Anesthesiology  32:218- 
230. 

Deuchar.  D.  C.  1966.  The  relations  of 
hallistixardiography  to  other  methods  of 
studying  the  cardiovascular  system  in 
man.  In  A.  A.  Knoop  (editor).  Ballisto- 
cardiography and  cardiovascular  dvnamics, 
p.  225-236,'  William  &  Wilki'ns  Co.. 
Baltimore. 

Elsb,ich.  H.,  F.  A.  Rodrigo.  H.  W.  H.  Weeda. 
and  J.  Pool.  1970.  The  ballistocardiogram 
in  selection  for  and  assessment  of  physical 
conditioning  in  patients  with  ischemic 
heart  disease.  Bibl.  Cardiol.  26:49-51. 

Green.  R.  F.  1971.  Observations  on  the 
anatomy  of  st>me  cetaceans  and  pinnipeds. 
In  S.  H.  Ridgwav  (editor).  Mammals  of 
the  sea.  Biology  and  medicine.  C.  C. 
Thomas.  Springfield,  p.  269. 

Holloszv.  J.  O..  J.  S.  Skinner.  A.  J.  Barry, 
and  T.  K..  Cureton.  1964.  Effect  of 
physical  conditioning  on  cardiovascular 
function.      Am.    J.    Cardiol.     14:761-770. 

Juznic.  G.  1970.  The  ultra-low  frequency 
ballistocardiogram  of  the  mouse.  Bibl. 
Cardiol.  26:280-291. 

Leighton.  R.  F..  A.  M.  Weissler.  P.  B.  Wein- 
stein,  and  C.  F.  Wooley.  1971.  Right 
and  left  ventricular  systolic  time  inter- 
vals.   Am.  J.Cardiol.  27:66-72. 

Moss,  A.  J.  1961.  Ballistocardiographic 
evaluation  of  the  cardiovascular  aging 
process.    Circulation  23:434-451. 

Noble.  M.  I.  M..  I.  T.  Gabe.  and  D.  Tren- 
chard. 1967.  Blood  pressure  and  flow 
in  the  ascending  aorta  of  conscious  dogs. 
Cardiovasc.  Res.  1:9-20. 

Noble.  M.  I.  M.,  D.  Trenchard.  and  A.  Guz. 
1966.  Studies  of  the  maximum  accelera- 
lit^n  of  blotid  in  the  ascending  .Kirta  oi 
conscious  dogs.     In  A.  A.  K.noop  (editor). 


Ballistocardiography  and  cardiovascular 
dynamics,  p.  243-247.  William  &  Wilkins 
Co..  Baltimore. 

Rushmer.  R.  F.  1964.  Initial  ventricular 
impulse.  A  potential  key  to  cardiac 
evaluation.    Circulation  29:268-283. 

1970.  Cardiovascular  dy- 
namics. 3rd  ed.  W.  B.  Saunders  Co.. 
Philadelphia,  p.  110. 

Scarborough.  W.  R.,  E.  F.  Folk.  III.  P.  M. 
Smith,  and  J.  H.  Condon.  1958.  The 
nature  of  records  from  ultra-low  frequency 
ballistocardiographic  systems  and  their 
relation  to  circulatorv  events.  Am.  J. 
Cardiol.  2:613-641. 

Smith.  N.  T.  In  press.  Ballistocardiography. 
In  A.  M.  Weissler  (editor).  Noninvasive 
methods  in  cardiac  evaluation.  Grune 
and  Stratton.  New  York. 

Smith.  N.  T..  R.  L.  Van  Citters,  and  P.  D. 
Verdouw.  1970.  The  relation  between 
the  ultra-low  frequency  ballistocardio- 
gram, the  acceleration  pneumocardio- 
gram.  and  ascending  aortic  flow  accelera- 
tion in  the  baboon.  Bibl.  Cardiol. 
26:198-205. 

Starr.  I.,  and  A.  Noordergraaf.  1967. 
Ballistocardiography  in  cardiovascular 
research.  J.  B.  llippincott  Co..  Phila., 
438  p. 

Talbot.  S.  A.,  and  W.  K.  Harrison.  Jr.  1955. 
Dynamic  comparison  of  current  ballisto- 
cardiographic methods.  Part  I:  Artefacts 
in  the  dynamically  simple  ballistocardio- 
graphic methods.     Circulation   12:577-587. 

Tannenbaum,  O.,  H.  Vessell.  and  J.  A. 
Schack.  1956.  Relationship  of  the 
natural  body  damping  and  body  frequency 
to  the  ballistocardiogram.  Circulation 
13:404-409. 

Tischenko.  M.  1.  1963.  The  significance 
of  natural  vibrations  of  the  human  body 
in  shaping  the  ballistocardiogram.  Bio- 
physics 8:311-319. 

Walker.  E.  P.  1968.  Mammals  of  the 
world.  Vol.  II.  Johns  Hopkins  Press. 
Baltimore,  p.  921. 

Weissbach.  G.  H.-J.  1960a.  Die  Rolle 
der  Tischmasse  und  der  Wert  einer 
zusatzlichen  Diimpfung  beim  Elongations- 
ballistokardiographcn.  [In  Ger.)  Pflue- 
gers     Arch.     ges.     Physiol.      270:529-535. 

1960b.        Die      registrier- 

technischen  Eigenschaften  des  direklen 
ballistokardiographen.  Z.  Kreislaufforsch. 
49:626-630. 

Weissler.  A.  M..  R.  G.  Peeler,  W.  H.  Roehll, 
Jr.,  and  N.  C.  Durham.  1960.  Relation- 
ships between  left  ventricular  ejection 
time,  stroke  volume,  and  heart  rale  in 
normal  individuals  and  patients  with 
cardiovascular  disease.  Am.  Heart  J. 
62:367-378. 

Winter,  P.  J.,  D.  C.  Deuchar,  M.  N.  Noble, 
and  A.  Guz.  1966.  The  ballistocardiogram 
and  left  ventricular  ejection  in  the  dog. 
In  A.  A.  Knoop  (editor).  Ballistocardiog- 
raphv  and  cardiovascular  dynamics,  p. 
248-254.  Williams  c<;  Wilkins  Co..  Balti- 
more. 

Winter,  P.  J.,  D.  C.  Deuchar.  N.  1.  M.  Noble, 
et  al.  1967.  Relationship  between  the 
ballistocardiogram  and  the  movement 
of  blood  from  the  left  ventricle  in  the 
dog.    Cardiovasc.  Res.  1:194-200. 


MFR  Paper  1046.  From  Marine  Fisheries  Review,  Vol. 
36.  No.  4.  April  1974.  Copies  of  this  paper,  in  limited 
numbers,  are  available  from  D83.  Technical  Informa- 
Division.     Environmental     Science     Information 


tion 


Center.  NOAA.  Washington.  DC  20235. 


14 


MFR  PAPER  1047 

Investigation  of  Blubber  Thickness  in  a 
Gray  Whale  Using  Ultrasonography 

MICHAEL  P.  CURRAN  and  WILLIAM  M.  ASHER 

ABSTRACT 

A  captive  juvenile  i;ray  whale.  Eschrichtius  robustus.  was  studied  with  tdtra- 
soiind  using  A-mode  technique.  Measurements  of  hiuhher  and  fat  titickness  by 
means  of  selected  tissue  interfaces  were  made.  Suture  implantation  depths  were 
also  measured.  Ultrasound  woidd  he  a  reliable  method  for  measiirini;  hiuhher 
and   fat   thicknesses   to   .y/ic   insiiiht   to  a   marine   moiitmal's    nutritional   status. 


PROBLEM 

A  captive  yearling  gray  whale  was 
considered  for  ultrasound  study  1)  to 
measure  blubber  and  fat  thickness  to 
reflect  on  nutritional  status,  and  2) 
to  measure  depth  of  polyethylene 
suture  implantations  being  used  for  an 
attachment  of  a  radio  transmitter  de- 
vice on  the  animal's  dorsal  surface. 

PROPOSAL 

Using  an  ultrasound  beam  with 
A-mode  technique,  it  was  proposed  to 
measure  skin,  blubber,  fat.  and  muscle 
depth.  Tissues  of  varying  density  will 
reflect  ultrasound  echoes  from  their 
respective  interfaces.  A  porpoise.  Tur- 
siops  truncutus.  model  was  proposed 
for  correlation. 

BACKGROUND 

Ultrasound  is  a  relatively  new  sci- 
ence which  is  meeting  with  intense 
interest  and  enthusiasm  for  medical 
diagnostic  and  research  purposes.  It 
has  proven  effective  in  detecting  brain 
midline  shifts  with  the  echoencephalo- 
gram.  Examinations  of  the  heart  to 
predict  cardiac  output,  mitral  valve 
activity,  and  presence  or  absence  of 
pericardial  effusions  are  made.  B-scan 
examination  of  the  abdomen  to  localize 
and  characterize  various  masses  and 
organs  in  the  peritoneal  cavity  and 
retroperitoneal  space  is  accepted  prac- 


tice. Obstetrics  has  found  valuable 
use  for  ultrasound  in  evaluating 
gestational  age.  placental  location, 
and  pelvic  masses. 

In  the  field  of  veterinary  medicine 
this  technique  has  made  it  possible 
to  select  breeding  stock  by  determina- 
tion of  the  fat  and  muscle  interfaces, 
allowing  identification  of  those  ani- 
mals with  the  best  commercial  poten- 
tial. This  latter  application  suggested 
measurements  for  marine  animals  to 
evaluate  nutrition. 

MATERIALS  AND  METHODS 

Utilizing  commercially  available 
pulsed  ultrasound  equipment  designed 
for  medical  application,  multiple 
measurements  of  the  echo  interfaces 
of  the  gray  whale  were  obtained  at 
selected  positions  along  the  dorsal- 
lateral  aspect  and  axilla.  Additional 
measurements  were  obtained  over  the 
polyethylene  sutures  to  determine  the 


Lt.  Conidr.  Michael  P.  Curran, 
MC.  USNR,  and  Lt.  Comdr. 
William  M.  Asher,  MC,  USN, 
are  both  from  the  Department 
of  Ultrasound  and  the  Clinical 
Investigation  Center,  Naval  Hos- 
pital, San  Diego,  CA  92134. 
The  opinions  or  assertions  con- 
tained herein  are  those  of  the 
authors  and  are  not  to  be  con- 
strued as  official  nor  as  reflecting 
the  views  of  the  Navy  Depart- 
ment. 


suture  depth.  All  of  this  material  was 
displayed  on  a  cathode  ray  oscillo- 
scope with  a  linear  scale  divided  into 
millimeter  increments.  As  an  in  vitro 
correlation  to  provide  information  as 
to  which  structures  were  providing 
the  echo  interfaces  observed  in  the 
live  mammal,  a  porpoise  model  with 
necropsy  section  was  obtained.  Using 
a  direct  visual  placement  of  the  trans- 
ducer in  similar  areas  to  that  of  the 
gray  whale,  the  echo  interfaces  were 
photographed  on  the  oscilloscope. 
Direct  linear  measurements  and  ana- 
tomical identification  of  the  structures 
traversed  were  performed.  These  echo 
patterns  correlated  highly  with  the 
similar  patterns  obtained  from  the 
gray  whale  and  indicated  which  struc- 
tures were  providing  these  echoes. 
Thin  section  radiographs  were  ob- 
tained of  the  porpoise  model,  further 
demonstrating  the  density  differences 
of  tissue  between  the  skin  lines,  blub- 
ber, areolar  fat,  muscle,  and  fascial 
surfaces.  In  all  cases  the  measurements 
corresponded  exactly  to  the  visual 
interpretation  of  the  fascial,  fat,  bone, 
and  skin  interfaces. 

DISCUSSION 

Elementary  Ultrasound  Physics 

Although  ultrasonic  technology  in 
medicine  is  relatively  new,  the  earliest 
experiments  date  back  to  the  I800"s 
when  attempts  to  produce  high  fre- 
quency sounds  were  performed.  In 
1883  Gallon  developed  an  ultrasound 
whistle  which  was  capable  of  produc- 
ing vibrations  as  high  as  25,000  cycles 
per  second.  In  modern  terminology, 
the  frequency  of  vibrations  is  assigned 
the  term  "Hertz"'  and  25,000  cycles 
per  second  is  abbreviated  as  25  kilo- 
heriz  (25  kHz).  In  1929  Sokolov  de- 
scribed an  ultrasonic  method  for  de- 
tecting flaws  in  metals.  Following 
this,  in  l')47.  this  new  modality  was 
utilized  in  medical  diagnosis  when 
early  workers  such  as  Keksell.  in 
Sweden,  demonstrated  the  ability  to 
delect  the  midline  of  intracerebral 
structures. 


15 


Electrical  to  Mechanical 


Mechanical  to  Electrica 

Figure  1. — Piezoelectric  eftect 


Figure  2. — Split  function  concept.  Pulsed  ultra- 
sound from  transducer  is  transmitted  10%  of  the 
time  and  received  90%  at  400  pulses/sec. 


Ultrasonics,  the  technology  of  high 
frequency  sound  waves,  deals  with  the 
transmission  of  sound  or  pressure 
waves  through  a  medium.  Sound 
waves,  unlike  electromagnetic  waves, 
cannot  be  transmitted  through  a  vac- 
uum. The  generation  of  sound  waves 
from  a  transducer  depends  on  a  phe- 
nomenon known  as  piezoelectric  ef- 
fect. This  effect  is  produced  when 
electrical  energy  is  applied  to  a  crystal 
which,  when  distorted  by  this  electri- 
cal energy,  will  produce  a  mechanical 
pressure  wave.  In  reverse,  the  piezo- 
electric effect  occurs  when  mechani- 
cal energy  distorts  the  crystal,  pro- 
ducing an  electrical  potential  which 
can  be  measured.  The  technique  of 
recording   reflected   ultrasound   results 


from  this  reversible  behavior.  (See 
Figures  1  and  2.)  Sound  waves  travel 
through  various  materials  with  char- 
acteristic velocities.  The  product  of 
the  density  of  the  material  and  the 
velocity  of  sound  through  the  given 
material  is  called  "characteristic  acous- 
tic impedance"  (Zl.  When  the  two 
substances  adjacent  to  each  other 
transmit  sound  at  a  different  velocity, 
the  ultrasonic  reflection  (/?)  at  the 
boundary  is  determined  by  the  ratio 
of  the  two  acoustic  impedances  as 
described  in  the  formula 


A  f 


^=-f- 


1.5  OO 


5,000,000    cyC/ 


If  the  two  substances  have  the  same 
acoustic  impedance,  the  numerator 
becomes  zero  and  there  is  no  reflection. 
On  the  other  hand,  if  there  is  a  large 
difference  between  the  acoustic  im- 
pedances, the  result  approaches  unity, 
and  almost  all  of  the  energy  is  reflect- 
ed. In  between  these  two  extremes 
some  of  the  sound  energy  is  reflected 
while  that  remaining  passes  through 
the  interface.  Since  most  soft  tissues 
have  acoustic  impedances  that  are 
quite  similar,  there  are  relatively  weak 
reflections  at  the  boundaries.  The  air- 
tissue  interface  is  the  strongest  biologi- 
cal reflector.  The  bone-tissue  inter- 
face, likewise,  produces  a  very  strong 
reflection.  As  most  reflections  are  rela- 
tively weak,  sensitive  equipment  is  re- 
quired to  detect  those  boundaries 
with  the  less  strongly  reflected  echoes 
and  interfaces  such  as  fat-muscle. 

What  is  the  resolution  of  the  sys- 
tem? The  frequency  of  sound  deter- 
mines its  wavelength.  The  resolution 
is  likewise  dependent  on  the  wave- 
length in  the  axial  direction.  The  high- 
er the  frequenc) .  the  smaller  the 
wavelength;  thus,  we  have  a  better 
resolution  capabilits  as  determined 
by  the  formula  r  =  X/  where  r  is  the 
velocity  of  the  sound  in  the  medium. 
X  is  the  wavelength,  and  /  is  the  fre- 
quency. We  assume  that  the  minimum 
distance  between  two  objects  for  dis- 


=  3x10"^ 
=  0.3  mm  =  A 

A  X  1.5  =  Minimum  Distance 
Between  T\a/o  Objects 
for  Discrimination. 

=  0.45  mm  For  5  mhz 

Figure  3. — Formula  lor  resolution. 

crimination  must  be  equal  to  at  least 
l'/2  wavelengths.  (See  Figure  3.)  By 
going  to  higher  frequencies,  however. 
we  lose  penetration  in  tissue  due  to 
sound  attenuation:  therefore,  a  com- 
promise must  be  made  and  the  fre- 
quency selected  which  gives  adequate 
axial  resolution,  yet  adequate  penetra- 
tion through  the  tissue  thickness.  For 
the  mammalian  models  studied  the 
frequency  varied  between  1  and  2 
megahertz,  which  was  adequate  for 
penetration  through  the  structure 
studied. 

Findings 

Although  the  size  dilterence  be- 
tween the  28  foot  captive  gray  whale 
and  the  captive  Atlantic  bottlenosed 
dolphin  {.Titrsiops  nuncaliis)  necrop- 
sy model  is  somewhat  different,  the 
anatomical  structures  of  the  mammals 
are  known  to  be  similar. 

During  periods  of  illness  or  mal- 
nutrition, marine  mammals  of  these 
species  are  noted  to  develop  a  depres- 
sion in  the  dorsal  contour  posterior  to 
the  axilla.  It  is  thought  that  this  de- 
pression is  due  to  catabolism  of  blub- 
ber, areolar  fat.  and/or  muscle  mass 
loss. 

Presuming  ihat  areolar  fat  dimin- 
ishes in   volume  prior  to  muscle  loss. 


Figure  4.  —  Radiograph  of  Turs/ops  cross  sec- 
tion demonstrating  (1)  blubber.  (2)  areolar  lat. 
(3)  muscle  group  to  fascial  layer,  and  (4)  second 
deep    muscle    group   to    dorsal    spinous    process. 


16 


17 


18 


one  could  measure  the  normal  thick- 
ness in  heahhy  mammals  and  compare 
with  abnormal  animals  and  any  avail- 
able necropsy  specimens. 

As  a  pilot  program,  echographic 
measurements  were  made  in  both  the 
gray  whale.  E.  robitstus.  and  the 
porpoise.  T.  nunccUiis.  Necropsy  cor- 
relation in  Tursiops  showed  that  the 
measurements  were  easy  to  perform 
and  were  highly  accurate.  (Figures 
4-8.) 


Applications 


Figure  6. — A-scan  of  Tursiops 
cross  section.  Lettered  spikes 
conform  to  radiograpfis  and 
tissue  boundaries  as  measured 
in  necroscopy  section:  (A- 
B)  blubber  ttiickness  =  2 
cm.  (C-D)  fat  thickness  = 
1  cm,  and  (D-E)  muscle 
ttiickness  =  8.2  cm. 


Ideally,  to  make  this  method  most 
useful,  measurements  should  be  made 
and  necropsy  correlation  measure- 
ments obtained  whenever  these  mam- 
mals are  found  deceased.  Due  to  the 
expense  and  shortage  of  the  species, 
flying  a  small  team  to  the  animal  site 
with  the  easily  portable  battery  or 
generator  operated  scanning  equip- 
ment should  be  the  most  effective 
means  of  collecting  this  invaluable 
data. 

Further  observations  on  the  nutri- 
tional status  during  development  com- 
paring captive  and  free  animals,  as 
well  as  disease  effects,  should  prove 
to  be  a  new  approach  to  the  study  of 
marine  mammals.  Such  research  data, 
if  accumulated,  may  be  of  great  bene- 
fit in  the  protection  and  treatment  of 
valuable,  trained  marine  mammals 
and  their  free  swimming  counterparts. 

CONCLUSION 

A-mode  echography  is  an  effective 
means  of  measurement  of  tissue  layers 
and  should  be  an  effective  tool  in  the 
study  of  marine  mammal  nutrition 
and  health  status. 


Figure  7. — A-scan  of  gray 
wtiale  dorsal-lateral  surface 
posterior  to  axilla  demonstrat- 
ing blubber  thickness  of  4.1 
cm  (A-B)  and  fat  thickness  of 
4.6  cm  B-C).  C  represents 
fat-muscle  interface. 


Figure  8. — A-scan  of  gray 
whale  for  polyethylene  suture 
localization.  (A)  Skin.  (B) 
Blubber-fat  interface  at  3.5 
cm.  (C)  Polyethylene  suture 
at  5.5  cm.  (D)  Fat-muscle 
interface  at  7  cm. 


Figure  5.  —  Radiograph  of  Tursiops  cross  section 
demonstrating  (A)  skin-blubber  interface,  (B) 
blubber-fat  interface,  (C)  fat-muscle  interface. 
(D)  muscle-fascial  layer  interface,  and  (E)  re- 
flective bone  (dorsal  spinous  process). 


19 


REFERENCES 

Ashcr,  W.  M..  und  A.  K..  Freimanis.  1%^. 
Echographic  diagnosis  of  retroperitoneal 
lymph  node  enlargement.  Ultrasound  scan- 
ning technique  and  diagnostic  findings. 
Am.  J.  Roentgenol.  Radium  Ther.  Nucl. 
Med.  105:438-445. 

Freimanis.  A.  K.,  and  W.  M.  Asher.  1970. 
Development  of  diagnostic  criteria  in 
echographic  study  of  abdominal  lesions. 
Am.  J.  Roentgenol.  Radium  Ther.  Nucl. 
Med.  108:747-755. 

Grossman,  C.  C,  J.  E.  Holmes.  C.  Jovner, 
and  E.  W.  Purnell  (editors).  1966.  Di- 
agnostic ultrasound.  Proc.  First  Int.  Conf. 
Univ.    Pittsburgh,     1965.     Plenum    Press, 


New  York,  5  19  p. 
Lehman,      J.      S.      1969.     Ultrasonography. 

Delaware  Med.  J.  40:24-25. 
Okasawa,     A.,     and     L.     Hakkinen.      1969. 

Comparative  experiments  on  the  attenua- 


tion of  ultrasound  in  muscular  and  fat 
tissue.  Acta  Aphthal  (Kohenhavn)  47:735. 
Strakova,  M..  and  J.  Markova.  1971.  Ul- 
trasound use  for  measuring  subcutaneous 
fat.     Rev.  Czech.  Med.  17:66-73. 


MFR  Paper  1047.  From  Marine  Fisheries  Review,  Vol. 
36,  No.  4,  April  1974.  Copies  of  this  paper,  in  limited 
numbers,  are  available  from  D83,  Technical  Information 
Division,  Environmental  Science  Information  Center, 
NCAA.  Washington.  DC  20235. 


MFR  PAPER  1048 


MATERIALS  AND  METHODS 


Surgical  Attachment  of  a  Telemetry  Device 

to  the  Dorsal  Ridge  of  a  Yearling 

California  Gray  Whale,  Eschrichtius  robustus 

JOHN  C.  SWEENEY  and  JOEL  L.  MATTSSON 

ABSTRACT 

Siiri^iccil  atuichiiu'iil  of  an  instrument  packufie  moiiniinf^  device  onto  the  dorsul 
rUli;e  of  a  yenrliiii'  feinnle  California  i-ray  whale.  Eschrichtius  robustus,  wa.\ 
accomplished  lhroui;h  the  utilization  of  four  lariie  polypropylene  sutures.  Use 
of  polypropylene  and  polyester  fabric  meshes  to  induce  tissue  i;ronth  aroutid  the 
sutures  was  not  successful.  Post-operative  therapy  was  heneficial  in  iiisuriui.; 
adequate  healing  at  the  suture  sites.  The  original  polypropylene  sutures  were 
replaced  the  day  before  release  by  polyvinyl  chloride  coated  stainless  steel. 


INTRODUCTION 

In  March  1971,  an  infant  female 
gray  whale  was  captured  within 
Scammon's  Lagoon,  Baja  California, 
and  subsequently  transported  by  boat 
to  Sea  World,  Inc.  in  San  Diego.  Calif. 
The  animal  was  captured  for  research 
purposes,  and  for  the  year  following 
her  capture,  various  studies  were  un- 
dertaken. 

As  the  animal  approached  1  year  of 
age.  the  financial  burden  to  Sea  World 
in  holding  facilities,  personnel,  and 
food  made  it  necessary  to  design  a 
plan  for  her  release.  At  that  time. 
W.  E.  Evans,  of  the  Naval  Undersea 
Center.  San  Diego,  proposed  (with  the 
support  of  the  National  Oceanic  and 


Atmospheric  Administration)  that  the 
whale  be  released  carrying  a  telemetry 
device  for  tracking  and  recording. 

Evans  (1971)  has  reported  the  use 
of  radiotelemetry  devices  attached  to 
the  dorsal  fin  of  dolphin,  using  a  bolt 
placed  through  the  tin.  Martin.  Evans, 
and  Bowers  (1971)  have  utilized  a 
harness  for  the  fixation  of  a  device 
onto  a  pilot  whale.  A  gray  whale  has 
no  dorsal  fin  for  bolt  fi,\ations.  and 
the  growth  rate  of  this  animal  left  the 
harness  method  undesirable.  There- 
fore, a  surgical  fixation  was  considered 
the  method  of  choice. 

J«»hn  C.  Sweeney  and  Joel  L. 
Maltsson  are  associated  with  the 
Naval  Undersea  Center,  San 
Diego,  C A  91132. 


Sutures  composed  of  .■*  mm  diame- 
ter polypropylene  were  swaged  onto 
a  stainless  steel  needle  made  from  3 
mm  diameter  rod  shaped  into  a  10  cm 
diameter  half  circle.  Pohpropylene 
was  chosen  because  of  its  inert  nature 
in  mammalian  tissues  (Usher  et  al., 
1962)  and  because  of  its  availability 
in  the  dimensions  required.  Two  types 
of  prosthetic  mesh  were  used  in  con- 
junction with  the  sutures,  polypro- 
pylene (Marlex®')  mesh  and  polyester 
fiber  (Mersilene*-). 

Five  weeks  before  the  scheduled  re- 
lease, an  attempt  was  made  to  place 
polypropylene  mesh  pads  (2  cm  X  2 
cm)  subdermally  at  the  entrance  and 
exit  sites  of  the  four  proposed  sutures 
at  positions  on  a  longitudinal  plane 
10  cm  to  either  side  of  the  dorsal 
ridge  and  10  cm  apart.  The  intention 
was  to  induce  collagen  fiber  infiltra- 
tion within  the  fabric  to  add  strength 
to  the  skin  and  to  prevent  infiltration 
of  water  once  the  sutures  were  in  place. 
The  skin  was  closed  with  simple  inter- 
rupted nylon  sutures. 

Four  weeks  before  release  the  four 
polypropylene  sutures,  each  having 
had  a  sheet  of  polyester  fabric  at- 
tached to  it  using  Eastman  9-10  ad- 
hesive.'' were  placed  at  the  proposed 
sites.  Depth  of  penetration  of  the  su- 
tures was  later  confirmed  by  ultrason- 
ography to  be  from  4  to  6  cm  (Curran 

'Cavol.  Inc.,  Providence.  R.I.  Reference  to  trade 
names   does   not   imply  endorsement   by   the   Na- 
tional Marine  Fisheries  Service,  NCAA 
-Ethicon.  Inc  ,  Scmerville,  N  J 
^'Eastman  Chemical  Products,  Kingsport,  Tenn, 


20 


and  Asher.  1974)  all  King  within  the 
I'attN  tissue  between  blubber  and 
muscle.  Once  in  position,  the  suture 
ends  were  temporarily  fused,  each 
suture  forming  a  ring  enclosing  the 
dorsal  ridge  (Figure  1).  Each  surgical 
procedure  was  done  under  local  an- 
esthesia,  using   2    percent   Xylocaine. 

RESULTS 

Both  attempts  to  utilize  mesh  fabrics 
were  unsuccessful.  Because  no  fascial 
interface  is  present  between  epidermis 
and  dermis,  or  dermis  and  hypodermis. 
in  cetaceans,  placement  of  mesh  pads 
under  the  skin  was  not  accomplished. 
After  attempts  were  made  at  two  of 
the  operative  sites,  it  became  apparent 
that  it  would  be  too  difficult  to  embed 
the  pads  properly.  In  addition,  the 
sutures  cut  through  the  epidermis 
when  even  light  tension  was  applied, 
preventing  adequate  closure  of  the 
incision.  Because  of  these  problems, 
the  procedure  was  not  completed. 
Within  5  days,  each  of  the  mesh  pads 
had  been  sloughed. 

The  mesh  coated  sutures  did  not 
induce  tissue  infiltration,  but  rather, 
acted  as  an  irritant  with  a  consequent 
tissue  inflammatory  response. 

Some  drainage  from  the  suture 
holes  was  observed  on  the  third  post- 
operative day.  and  at  this  time,  all 
four  sutures  were  easily  moved  back 
and  forth  within  their  tissue  bed.  The 
exudate  was  composed  of  clear,  non- 
viscous  fluid  containing  tags  of  white 
coagulated  matter  dispersed  through- 
out. Cellular  composition  was  70  per- 
cent mature  neutrophils  and  30  per- 
cent lytnphocytes.  Swabs  were  taken 
on  the  third  postoperative  day  and  on 
two  subsequent  occasions.  No  bacteria 
were  found.  Daily  flushing  of  each 
suture  site  with  normal  saline  and 
nitrofurazone  solution  was  done  for 
the  ne\t  three  postoperative  weeks.  At 
no  time  did  the  animal  appear  sick, 
nor  was  there  any  indication  in  her 
blood  tests  to  suggest  that  an  infection 


Figure  2. — Normal  healing  around  polypropylene 
sutures. 


Figure   1. — Polypropylene   sutures   in   position   with   ends  (used,   forming  a   ring 
enclosing  the  dorsal  ridge. 


21 


was  present.  By  the  end  of  the  3  week 
postoperative  period,  normal  healing 
was  considered  well  underway  (Figure 
2).  and  there  was.  by  then,  no  drainage 
from  any  of  the  suture  sites,  though 
the  sutures  were  still  freely  movable. 
One  week  before  the  scheduled  re- 
lease, the  instrument  package  saddle 
was  mounted  onto  the  sutures  to  allow 
the  animal  time  to  adjust  to  it  before 
adding  the  somewhat  heavier  (approxi- 
mately 6  kg)  instrument  package  itself. 
The  animal  occasionally  rubbed  the 
saddle  against  the  side  of  the  tank 
until  the  attachment  was  tightened  to 
reduce  free-play  of  the  saddle  as  the 
animal  swam.  On  the  day  before  re- 
lease, cracking  of  the  polypropylene 
sutures  was  noticed,  requiring  their 
replacement  with  sutures  of  the  same 


diameter  composed  of  polyvinyl  chlor- 
ide coated  stainless  steel.  These  were 
found  to  be  more  pliable  and  stronger 
than  the  polypropylene. 

At  the  last  visual  sighting  of  the 
animal  on  7  April  1972.  the  instru- 
ment package  was  still  securely  at- 
tached despite  the  fact  that,  on  several 
occasions,  kelp  had  been  seen  trailing 
from  it  (J.  S.  Leatherwood.  pers. 
comm.).  At  this  time,  we  have  no  in- 
dication that  this  procedure  has.  in 
any  way.  compromised  the  ability  of 
this  animal  to  survive. 


LITERATURE  CITED 


Curran.  M.  P.,  and  W.  M.  Asher,  1974. 
Investigation  of  blubber  thickness  in  a 
gray  whale  using  ultrasonography.  Mar. 
Fish.  Rev.  36(4):  lS-20. 

Evans.  W.  E.  1971.  Orientation  behavior 
of  delphinids:  radio  telernetric  studies. 
Ann-N.-*'.  .Acad.  Sci.  188:142-160. 

Martin,  H.,  W.  E.  Evans,  and  C.  A.  Bowers. 
1971.  Methods  for  Radio  Tracking  Ma- 
rine Mammals  in  the  open  sea.  IEEE  Eng. 
in  the  Ocean  Environ.  Conf.  p.  44-49. 

Usher,  F.  C,  J.  E.  Allen,  Jr.,  R.  W.  Crosth- 
wait,  and  J.  E.  Cogan.  1962.  Polypro- 
pylene monofilament.  A  new  biologically 
inert  suture  tor  closing  contaminated 
wounds.  Am.  Med.  Assoc.  179:780-782. 


MFR  Paper  1048.  From  Marine  Fisheries  Review,  Vol. 
36,  No.  4.  April  1974.  Copies  of  this  paper,  in  limited 
numbers,  are  available  from  D83.  Technical  Informa- 
tion Division,  Environmental  Science  Information 
Center,  NCAA,  Washington,  DC  20235. 


MFR  PAPER  1049 


Some  Hematologic  Observations  on 
the  California  Gray  Whale 


ALFRED  ZETTNER 


ABSTRACT 

E.Kiiininalitin  of  llic  blood  of  the  California  i;ray  whale,  ohlaiiwil  .shortly 
after  its  arrival  at  Sea  World,  San  Dieijo  revealed  the  followiiti;  data:  H'BC-IJI.^ 
X  \0->lciihic  mm:  RBC-2.4  X  IO<^jcuhic  mm:  hemof^lohin-IO.O  gjlOO  ml: 
hematocrit-31  percent:  MCV-128  jj-^:  MCH-42.8  tijdii:  MCHC-32.4  percent. 
Hemonlohin  electrophoresis  showed  a  sini;le  hemof^lohin  hand  with  a  mobility 
similar  to  that  oj  human  hemoi;lobiii  /•'.  I  he  whale  hemoiilobin  was  100  percent 
alkali  resistant.  No  changes  of  this  hemoi;lobin  were  seen  on  repeated  analyses 
over  the  course  of  12  months. 


The    capture    of   a    young,    female 
California    gray    whale.    Eschrichiiits 
rohitstiis,   in   .Scammon's  Lagoon,  and 
its    maintenance    in    captivity    at    Sea 
World,  San  Diego  for   12  months  pro- 
Alfred    Zetlner    is    a    physiciun 
with    the    Division    of    Clinical 
Palholouy,  Depart incnt  of  Palii- 
olosy.  School  of  Medicine,  L'ni- 
versitv  of  California,  San  Diego, 
CA  92103. 


vided  the  opportunity  for  some  hema- 
tologic studies  which  are  to  be  report- 
ed here. 

ROUTINE  BLOOD 
EXAMINATION 

A  heparini^ed  blood  sample  ob- 
tained on  18  March  1971.  one  day 
after  the  arrival  of  the  whale  at  Sea 
World,    was    brouuht    to    the   Clinical 


Laboratories  of  University  Hospital. 
University  of  California.  San  Diego. 
The  blood  was  analyzed  on  a  Coulter 
Counter.'  Model  "S".  which  allows 
the  automatic  simultaneous  determin- 
ation of  cell  counts,  mean  corpuscular 
volume  (MCV).  and  hemoglobin  con- 
tent. The  hematocrit,  mean  corpuscu- 
lar hemoglobin  (MCH).  and  the  mean 
corpuscular  hemoglobin  concentra- 
tion (MCHC)  are  automatically  com- 
puted from  the  three  parameters 
measured  (Pinkerton  et  al.,  1970) 
The  instrument  is  standardized  twice 
daily  and  performs  approximately  200 
analyses  per  day  for  clinical  purposes. 
The  results  were  the  following: 

WBC-13.9  X    lO^Vcubic  mm 

RBC-2.4  X    lO'Vcubic  mm 

Hemoglobin- 1 0.0  g/ 1 00  ml 

HCT-3  I  percent 

MCV- 128 /J-' 

MCH-42.8;ttiUg 

MCHC-32.4  percent 
A     blood    smear    was     prepared     and 
stained     by     the     automatic     HEMA- 
TEK-     technique,    which    employs    a 


'Coulter  Electronics,  Inc  ,  Hialeati.  Fla  Refer- 
ences to  trade  names  does  not  imply  endorse- 
ment by  ttie  National  tvlarine  Fistienes  Service. 
NOAA. 

^Ames  Company.  Division  of  Miles  Laboratories, 
Inc.  Elktiart.  Ind 


22 


moditicd  Wrighl-Giemsa  slain,  and 
examined  by  oil  immersion  microscopy. 
The  red  cells  were  round,  moderate- 
ly anisocytotic  ranging  from  7.5-9.5  /i 
in  diameter,  and  appeared  well  hemo- 
globinated  with  only  occasional  slight 
central  pallor.  An  occasional  red  cell 
displayed  polychromasia.  and  some 
rare  Howell-Jolly  bodies  were  seen. 
No  nucleated  red  cells  were  encoun- 
tered. 

A  white  cell  differential  count  was 
as  follows; 

Segmented  neutrophils  b^  percent 
Band  forms  19  percent 

Metamyelocytes  <  1  percent 

Monocytes  9  percent 

Lymphocytes  8  percent 

No  eosinophils  nor  basophils  were  en- 
countered. The  lymphocytes  were  all 
of  the  large  type.  No  small  lympho- 
cytes with  the  typically  scant  cyto- 
plasm and  dark  staining  nuclei  were 
present.  Twenty-one  percent  of  the 
nuclei  of  the  mature,  segmented  neu- 
trophils had  distinct  '"drumstick"  ap- 
pendages. 

The  thrombocytes  appeared  as 
round  platelets,  with  diameters  ap- 
proximately one-third  to  one-half  of 
those  of  the  red  cells.  Their  number, 
estimated  from  their  frequency  distri- 
bution on  the  smear  in  relation  to  the 
erythrocytes,  was  in  the  range  of 
300.000-350,000/cubic  mm. 

HEMOGLOBIN 
ELECTROPHORESIS 

Hemoglobin  electrophoresis  was 
performed  by  the  vertical  acrylamide 
gel  technique  as  described  in  detail 
elsewhere  (Bierman  and  Zettner.  1967) 
(Nakaniichi  and  Raymond.  1963). 
Briefly,  a  toluene  hemolysate  of  the 
washed  red  cells  is  prepared  and  elec- 
trophoresed  in  Tris-buffer  of  pH  9,0 
for  3'/2  hours  at  120  ma.  The  acryla- 
mide gel  slabs  are  then  stained  with 
amido  black  and  destained  electro- 
phoretically  in  5  percent  acetic  acid. 

The  results  are  shown  in  Figure  1. 
The  whale  hemoglobin  (Slots  Nos.  I 
and  7)  migrated  slightly  slower  than 
human    hemoglobin    A.    The    position 


SLOT    I 


3     4      5      6     7 


6-9'71 


Whale  non-heme   protein 
(Whale  Carbonic  Anhydrase  ?) 

Human  Corbonic  Anhydrase  B 

Humon  HbAg 
Human  HbS 

Gray    Whale  Hb 
Human    HbA 


fill     • 


Figure  1.  —  Vertical  acrylamide  gel  hemoglobin  electrophoresis.  Tris-buffer,  pH  9.0.  The  gel  contains 
the  toluene  hemolysates  of  the  following:  Slots  No.  1-gray  whale;  No.  2-human  with  A-S  trait;  No.  3,  4- 
normal  humans;  No.  5.6-standards;  No.  7-gray  whale  (same  as  slot  No.  1).  Original  (sample 
application  slots)  at  top.  Cathode-lop;  anode-bottom. 


of  the  band  of  the  whale  hemoglobin 
was  indistinguishable  from  that  where 
human  hemoglobin  F-'  would  be  ex- 
pected. No  minor  hemoglobin  com- 
ponents equivalent  to  those  found  in 
human  blood  could  be  detected.  The 
weakly  stained  band  of  much  slower 
mobility,  as  shown  in  Figure  I,  is  a 
non-heme  protein,  as  indicated  by  the 
failure  of  this  protein  band  to  react 
with  benzidine  when  a  freshly  electro- 
phoresed,  unstained  strip  of  the  gel 
containing  the  whale  sample  was  sub- 
mersed in  a  benzidine  and  peroxide 
solution. 

The  pattern  of  hemoglobin  electro- 
phoresis performed  on  blood  samples 
obtained  on  17  March  and  27  April 
1971,  and  13  March  1972  was  iden- 
tical to  that  demonstrated  here. 

ALKALI    DENATURATION 

A  quantitative  alkali  denaturation 
test  performed  on  the  toluene  hemoly- 
sate by  the  method  of  Singer,  Chernoff, 
and  Singer  ( 195  1)  revealed  the  whale's 
hemoglobin  to  be  100  percent  alkali 
resistant.  The  alkali  resistance  of  the 
hemoglobin  was  the  same  in  all  sam- 
ples obtained  over  the  course  of  1 
year,  as  listed  above. 


DISCUSSION 

The  values  of  the  various  red  cell 
parameters,  as  reported  here,  are  in 
fair  agreement  with  those  published  by 
Lenfant  (1969).  Relative  to  most  ter- 
restrial mammals,  the  California  gray 
whale  appears  to  have  lower  red  cell 
counts,  hemoglobin  concentrations, 
and  hematocrits,  although  the  MCV 
is  considerably  in  excess  of  100  jU^. 
A  proportional  increase  of  the  MCV 
of  red  cells  with  total  body  length  of 
marine  mammals  of  different  species 
has  been  shown  (Lenfant.  1969).  Of 
interest  is  the  finding  of  Lenfant  ( 1969) 
of  a  high  proportion  of  nucleated  red 
cells  in  the  gray  whale.  This  is  in 
distinct  contrast  to  the  complete  ab- 
sence of  nucleated  red  cells  in  the 
blood  samples  examined  here.  It 
should  be  considered  that  the  previous 
observations  were  apparently  made  on 
sick,  wounded,  dying,  or  dead  animals: 
and  that  under  these  abnormal  condi- 
tions, immature  red  cells  may  have 
been  released  into  the  circulation. 
The  only  indication  of  young  red  cells 
in  our  samples  were  the  rare  Howell- 
Jolly  bodies  and  occasional  polychro- 
masia. 


23 


The  white  cells  were  remarkable  in 
that  no  small  lymphocytes,  eosinophils, 
or  basophils  were  seen.  Otherwise, 
their  numbers  and  percentages  appear 
to  be  near  the  normal  limits.  Of  interest 
is  the  occurrence  of  "drumstick"  ap- 
pendages in  21  percent  of  the  mature 
segmented  neutrophils.  These  were 
described  by  Davidson  and  Smith 
(1954)  in  human  blood  as  a  genetic 
sex  indicator  for  females.  They  occur 
in  1-17  percent  of  the  segmented 
neutrophils  of  all  human  females  and 
are  thought  to  represent  the  inactivat- 
ed X-chromosome.  analogous  to  the 
Barr  body  observed  in  most  somatic 
cells.  It  can  be  reasonably  assumed 
that  also  in  the  whale,  drumsticks  in 
the  neutrophils  are  indicators  for  the 
female  sex. 

The  uniform  electrophoretic  mobil- 
ity of  this  gray  whale's  hemoglobin, 
characteristic  of  human  hemoglobin 
F.  is  in  accordance  with  the  finding  of 
others  (Lenfant,  1969).  Of  further 
interest  was  the  hemoglobin's  resistance 
to  alkali  denaturation.  However,  no 
conclusions  can  be  drawn  from  this 
coincidental  sharing  of  two  physical 
properties  with  human  hemoglobin  F 
as  to  functional  or  structural  similari- 
ties between  these  two  hemoglobins. 
The  reasons  for  the  alkali  resistance 
of  certain  hemoglobin  variants  are 
poorly  understood.  In  the  human  this 
is  related  not  only  to  the  presence  of 
gamma  chains  in  the  hemoglobin 
molecule,  but  also  to  the  structural 
relationships  of  the  various  chains  to 
each  other.  For  instance.  Bart's  hemo- 
globin, composed  of  four  gamma 
chains,  is  only  half  as  alkali  resistant 
as  hemoglobin  F,  which  is  a  tetramer 
of  two  alpha  and  two  gamma  chains. 
The  elucidation  of  the  structure  of 
the  gray  whale's  hemoglobin  depends 
on  the  full  analysis  of  its  amino 
acid  sequence.  .Such  an  undertaking 
can  also  be  expected  to  provide  some 
evolutionary  clues  for  the  California 
gray  whale. 

From  the  evidence  presented  here, 
it  appears  that  this  species  possesses 
only  one  type  of  structurally  uniform 
hemoglobin,   although    the    possibility 


that  we  are  dealing  with  two  or  more 
hemoglobins  of  identical  electropho- 
retic mobility  and  alkali  resistance 
cannot  be  entirely  excluded. 

The  band  of  non-heme  protein  ap- 
pears to  be  analogous  to  a  similar 
band  which  is  consistently  seen  in 
the  electrophoretograms  of  human 
bloods.  In  the  latter,  this  is  known  to 
represent  carbonic  anhydrase  B.  a  red 
cell  constituent  persistently  extracted 
with  the  toluene  hemolysates. 

LITERATURE  CITED 

Bicrman,  A.  H..  and  A.  Zettner.      1967.     A 
simple     electrophoretic     method     for    the 


quantitative  determination  of  hemoglobin 
A2.  Am.  J.  e'lm.  Palhol.  48: 1.19-146. 

Davidson.  W.  M..  and  D.  R.  Smith.  19.S4. 
A  morphological  sex  difference  in  the 
polymorphonuclear  neutrophil  Icukocvtes. 
Brit.  Med.  J.  ::6-7. 

Lenfanl,  C  1969.  Physiological  properties 
of  hlood  of  marine  mammals.  In  H.  T. 
Andersen  (editor).  The  biology  of  marine 
mammals,  p.  95-1  16.  Academic  Press.  N.Y. 

Nakamichi.  M..  and  S.  Raymond.  196,1. 
Acrvlamide-gel  electrophoresis  of  hemo- 
globins. Clin.  Chem.  9:  U.S.  145. 

Pmkerton,  P.  H.,  I.  Spence,  J.  C.  Ogilvie, 
W.  A.  Ronald.  P.  Marchant,  and  P.  K. 
Ray.  1970.  An  assessment  of  the  Coul- 
ter counter  model  S.  J.  Clin.  Palhol.  23: 
68-76. 

Singer.  K.,  A.  I.  Chernoff.  and  L.  Singer. 
1951.  Studies  on  abnormal  hemoglobins. 
1.  Their  demonstration  in  sickle  cell  anemia 
and  other  hematological  disorders  by 
means  of  alkali  denaturation.  Blood  J. 
Hematol.  6:413-428. 


MFR  Paper  1049.  From  Marine  Fisheries  Review,  Vol. 
36,  No.  4.  April  1974.  Copies  of  this  paper,  in  limited 
numbers,  are  available  from  D83,  Technical  Information 
Division.  Environmental  Science  Information  Center, 
NOAA.  Washington,  DC  20235. 


MFR  PAPER  1050 


Some  Coagulation  Factors  in  Plasma  from  a 
California  Gray  Whale,  Eschrichtius  robustus 


W.  MEDWAY 


ABSTRACT 


.4  cilniled  pkisimi  sample  was  assayed  for  some  couiiuhnion  faelors.  The 
levels  ohiaineil  were  compared  with  those  from  some  of  ihe  small  tooilied 
whales.  Factor  XII  activity  was  verx  low  in  the  i^rav  whale  sample,  whereas 
toothed  whales  have  none. 


INTRODUCTION 


Many  people  working  with  small 
odontocete  whales  in  captivity  have 
made  the  observation  that  whale 
blood  has  a  prolonged  clotting  time. 
Since  this  observation  was  made  two 
reports  have  described  the  lack  of 
clotting  Factor  XII  in  blood  in  some 
of  the  smaller  whales  (Lewis,   Bayer, 


and  Szeto,  1969:  Robinson,  kropat- 
kin,  and  Aggeler,  1969).  Another  pub- 
lication reports  a  prolonged  clotting 
time  of  blood  from  other  small  whales: 
however,  assays  for  Factor  XII  were 
not  made  (Ridgway,  1972).  There 
were  no  reports  of  similar  studies  on 
blood  from  any  baleen  whale:  hence 
this  report  on  some  studies  on  a  plas- 
ma sample  from  a  captive  California 
gray  whale.  Eschrichtius  rohiistiis. 


24 


MATERIALS  AND  METHODS 

A  titrated  plasma  sample  was  ob- 
tained from  a  young  ( 1-2  years)  female 
California  gray  whale  kept  in  cap- 
tivity in  San  Diego.  Calif.  The  sample 
was  deep-frozen  and  shipped  via  air 
express  to  Philadelphia  where  the 
assays  were  made.  The  plasma  sample 
was  slighth  llpcmic.  The  prothrombin 
time,  partial  thromboplastin  time. 
Factor  V.  Factor  XI,  and  Factor  XII 
assays  were  made  in  the  Coagulation 
Laboratory  at  the  Hospital  of  the 
UniversitN  of  Pennsylvania.  It  was  not 
possible  to  do  a  fibrinogen  assay  on 
the  sample. 

Standard  laboratory  procedures  em- 
pkning  commercial  reagents  were 
used  to  conduct  the  assays,  with  the 
e.xception  of  Factor  XII  where  dol- 
phin, Tiirsh'ps  iniiucims.  plasma  was 
used  as  the  substrate.  Plasma  reagent 
from  Factor  XI  deficient  cattle  was 
used  for  the  Factor  XI  assay. 

RESULTS  AND  DISCUSSION 

The  results  of  the  assays  on  the 
gray  whale  plasma  and  some  results 
on  a  few  odontocete  whales,  from  the 
literature,  are  shown  in  Tabic  I . 

The  divergence  of  our  results  on 
the  gray  whale  plasma  for  prothrom- 
bin time,  partial  thromboplastin  time. 
Factor  V,  and  Factor  XI  assays  from 
those  of  the  two  species  of  odontocete 
whales  can  be  explained  perhaps  on 
the  elapsed  time  between  sampling 
and  assay.  The  presence  of  a  low  level 
of  Factor  XII  in  the  gray  whale  plas- 
ma to  the  non-existence  in  odontocete 
plasma  warrants  some  consideration. 
The  significance  of  this  difference 
teleologically  is  not  known.  One  of 
the  problems  encountered  by  deep 
diving  humans  is  decompression  sick- 
ness. This  sickness  is  attributed  to  the 
formation  of  microdots  (disseminated 


W.  Medway  Is  associated  with 
the  Department  of  Clinical 
Studies,  School  of  Veterinary 
Medicine,  University  of  Pennsyl- 
vania, Philadelphia,  PA    19104. 


Table   1. — A  comparison  of  some  clotting  factors  between  odontocete  whales  and  a  baleen   whale 
The  numbers  in  parentheses  indicate  the  number  of  samples. 


Tursiops 


Orcinus 
orca- 


Eschnchtius 
robustus 


Prothrombin  time  (sec) 

Partial  thromboplastin  time  (ptt)  (sec) 

Factor  V(%) 

Factor  XI  (%) 

Factor  XI  t  {%) 


17.0(14) 

15.6(3) 

26.5(1) 

346  (15) 

216  (3) 

107  (1) 

136  (14) 

239  (3) 

17  sec  (1) 

92.7(14) 

146  (3) 

24.6(1) 

0  (15) 

0  (3) 

3.4(1) 

'  Lewis,  Bayer,  and  Szeto  (1969) 

-  Robinson.  Kropatkin,  and  Aggeler  (1969). 

■1  Ridgway  (1972). 


intravascular  coagulation)  with  re- 
sulting consequences.  It  is  known  that 
slow-moving  acid  blood  has  a  pro- 
pensity to  clot  faster.  This  property 
has  been  attributed  to  activation  of 
Factor  XII  and  subsequent  clot  for- 
mation. 

Whales  dive  deeply  and  are  not  be- 
lieved to  suffer  from  decompression 
sickness.  Perhaps  the  lack  of  Factor 
XII  or  low  levels  of  it  is  nature's  way 
of  protecting  the  animals. 

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS 

The  author  wishes  to  express  appre- 
ciation   to    H.    A.    Wurzel.    Director. 


Coagulation  Laboratory.  Hospital  of 
the  University  of  Pennsylvania,  and 
his  staff  as  well  as  to  J.  C.  Sweeney, 
Naval  Undersea  Center,  San  Diego, 
Calif,  for  providing  the  opportunity  to 
make   this  study    on   the   gray   whale. 

LITERATURE  CITED 

Lewis.  J.  H.,  W.  L.  Bayer,  and  I.  L.  F.  Szeto. 
1969.  Coagulation  factor  XII  deficiency 
in  the  porpoise.  Tursiops  Inimatits.  Comp. 
Biocheni.  Physiol.  .M:667-(-70. 

Robinson.  A.  J.,  M.  Kropatkin.  and  P.  M. 
Aggeler.  1969.  Hageman  factor  (factor 
.XII)  deficiency  in  marine  mammals.  Sci- 
ence (Wash..  D.  C.)  166:14:0-14::. 

Ridgway.  S.  H.  197:.  Homeostasis  in  the 
aquatic  environment.  In  S.  H.  Ridgway 
(editor).  Mammals  of  the  Sea.  p.  65.^. 
Charles  C.  Thomas.  Springfield. 


MFR  Paper  1050.  From  Marine  Fisheries  Review.  Vol. 
36.  No.  4.  April  1974.  Copies  of  this  paper,  in  limited 
numbers,  are  available  from  D83,  Tecfinical  Informa- 
tion Division,  Environmental  Science  Information  Cen- 
ter. NOAA.  Wasfiington.  DC  20235. 


MFR  PAPER  1051 


Fluorescent  Karyotype  of  the 
California  Gray  Whale 


DEBORAH  A.  DUFFIELD 


ABSTRACT 


The  Jhion-.sccnl  kuryolypc  of  the  California  .i;ray  nhale.  Eschrichtius  robustus, 
is  presented  and  the  aae  of  the  fluorescent  handini;  tecltniqiie  for  distini;uishini,' 
between  various  cetacean  karyotypes  is  discussed. 


The  California  gray  whale.  E\ch-  (Benirschke's  unpublished  data  cited 
ricliiiiis  rohitstiis  (Gibbosus)  has  a  in  Kulu,  1972;  Arnason.  1972).  Since 
diploid    chromosome    number    of    44      reporting  of  the  gray  whale  karyotype. 


25 


B. 


U 


X  X 


il  H  M  H  n 

if    IS    II    ti   II 


II    It    II  tt   II   It 


Figure  1. — Karyotype  of  the  California  gray  wfiale,  Gigi.  The  autosomes  are  arranged  into  four 
groups  based  on  centromere  positron  and  relative  size.  Tfie  provisional  X  ctiromosomes  are 
indicated. 


prepared  by  standard  honiogeneou.s 
staining  techniques,  advances  in  the 
differential  staining  of  chromosomes 
have  added  another  dimension  to 
tcaryotypic  analysis  by  making  it  now 
possible  to  individually  characterize 
each  chromosome  of  the  complement. 
Consequently,  and  as  part  of  a  larger 
cytotaxonomic  study  of  marine  mam- 
mals, evaluation  of  the  gray  whale 
karyotype  by  quinacrine  mustard 
fluorescent  banding  was  undertaken 
on  Gigi.  a  captive  female  gray  whale. 

MATERIALS  AND  METHODS 

Chromosome  preparations  were  ob- 
tained by  blood  culture  (Kulu.  Veo- 
melt.  and  Sparkes.  1971).  Exposure 
of  the  cells  to  0.075  M  KCI  for  8 
minutes  was  the  preferred  hypotonic 
treatment  and  cold,  rather  than  tlame- 
dried.  slides  were  made.  The  slides 
were  stained  with  Giemsa  for  normal 
karyotyping  or  with  quinacrine  mus- 
tard (50  micrograms/ml  buffer  for 
.^0-40  minutes)  for  fluorescent  karyo- 
typing. Photographs  of  fluorescent 
metaphases  were  taken  on  Kitdak' 
Tri-X  film  with  an  exposure  time  of 
45-50  seconds.  Ten  Giemsa  and  eight 
fluorescent  karyotypes  were  analyzed. 


'  Use  of  trade  names  m  this  publrcation  does 
not  imply  endorsement  ot  commercial  products 
by  ttie  National  Marine  Fistieries  Servrce 


RESULTS 

Gigis  karyotype  (Giemsa)  is  illus- 
trated in  Figure  1.  The  autosomes  are 
provisionally  arranged  into  four 
groups  (designated  A,  B,  C.  and  D). 
Group  A  is  composed  of  five  pairs  of 
large  submetacentric  chromosomes. 
Group  B  of  five  pairs  of  medium-sized 
submetacentrics.  Group  C  of  six  pairs 
of  metacentrics,  and  Group  D  of  five 
pairs  of  acrocentric  chromosomes. 
Within  each  group  the  chromosome 
pairs  are  arranged  by  decreasing  size. 
The  presumptive  .\  chromosomes  are 
indicated  in  the  karyotype. 

The  fluorescent  karyotype  of  Escli- 
ritiniiis  rohuslus  is  presented  in  Figure 
2.  The  arrangement  of  the  chromo- 
somes follows  that  of  the  standard 
karyotype.  The  banding  pattern  of 
each  chromosome  pair  is  distinctive 
and  in  addition  to  allowing  positive 
identification  of  the  homologues 
makes  it  possible  to  characterize  each 
pair  of  the  complement  in  order  to 
facilitate  karyotypic  comparison  with 
other  species.  The  fluorescent  banding 
pattern  of  the  presumptive  X  chromo- 


Dehorah  A.  Duftield  is  with  the 
Deparlmenl  of  Biology  at  (he 
University  of  California  at  Los 
Angeles,  Los  Angeles,  C  A  90024. 


some  is  the  same  as  that  exhibited  by 
the  X  chromosome  of  another  of  the 
baleen  whales,  the  sei  whale.  BaUwiiop- 
icrii  horcalis-,  and  a  number  of  the 
smaller  odontocete  cetacean  species 
(personal  observation). 


DISCUSSION 

The  karyotype  of  the  California 
gray  whale  appears  to  be  very  similar 
in  number  and  gross  morphology  to 
that  of  a  number  of  other  cetaceans, 
both  mysticete  and  odontocete''  (Kulu. 
1972:  Arnason.  1972).  The  fluorescent 
karyotype  of  the  gray  whale  was  ex- 
amined in  the  hope  that  the  resolution 
of  chromosome  structure  afforded  by 
fluorescent  banding  would  indicate 
differences  between  its  karyotype  and 
that  of  other  cetaceans  not  obvious  by 
regular  staining  methods.  In  order  to 
illustrate  the  level  of  karyotypic  com- 
parison made  possible  by  fluorescent 
banding,  the  larger  submetacentrics 
which  comprise  Group  A  (pairs  1-5) 
in  two  mysticete  and  two  odontocete 
species  are  shown  in  Figure  3.  While 
there  are  certain  similarities  between 
the  banding  patterns  of  all  four  species, 
it  is  clearly  possible  to  distinguish 
between  the  overall  banding  pattern 
of  the  mysticete  (gray  whale,  sei 
whale)  chromosomes  and  that  of  the 
odontocetes  ['l'uisi<>p\  inincaius.  Laf-- 
cnorhyiu  hits  tihliqiiidciis).  Less  obvi- 
ous differences  are  also  present  which 
further  distinguish  gray  whale  from  sei 
whale  and  Tiirsiops  from  Lugeno- 
rhyncluis.  A  detailed  comparison  of 
the  fluorescent  karyotypes  of  these 
cetaceans  is  beyond  the  scope  of  this 
report;  however,  it  can   be  concluded 

-  Arnason  (1972)  tias  reported  ttiat  ttie  X  ctiromo- 
some  of  B  boreahs  is  one  ot  ttie  larger  ctiromo- 
somes of  ttie  complement,  sucti  as  found  in 
other  ot  the  balaenopteran  whales  However, 
both  standard  and  fluorescent  karyotypes  ot  a 
male  sei  whale,  tissue  from  which  was  made 
available  to  this  author  by  the  Richmond  whaling 
station  in  California,  indicate  that  the  X  chromo- 
some of  8.  boreahs  is  of  medium  size  and 
similar  both  in  relative  size  and  banding  pattern 
to  the  provisional  X  chromosome  of  the  odon- 
tocetes (Kulu,  1972), 

■1  Of  all  cetaceans  studied  to  date,  only  the 
sperm,  pigmy  sperm,  and  killer  whales  are 
karyotypically  distinct  by  standard  staining 
techniques. 


26 


Figure  2. — The  fluorescent  karyotype  of  the  California  gray  whale.  Note  (hat  the  members  of  each 
pair  have  identical  bands  while  one  pair  can  be  distinguished  from  any  other  by  its  characteristic 
banding  pattern. 


Figure  3. — Comparison  of  the  banding  patterns  of  four  species.  Only  group  A  chromosomes  are 
shown  and  only  one  chromosome  from  each  pair  per  species.  Species  1  and  2  are  mysticetes, 
3  and  4  are  odontocetes. 


27 


from  these  initial  observations  that  the 
comparison  of  fluorescent  banded 
karyotypes  will  significantly  enhance 
the  potential  contribution  which  kary- 
otypic  analyses  can  make  to  the  reso- 
lution of  the  phyletic  interrelationships 
of  the  modern  Cetacea. 

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS 

My   thanks  to  Sea  World  and  Jay 
Sweeney  of  the  Naval  Undersea  Cen- 


ter. San  Diego.  Calif,  for  making  the 
gray  whale  samples  available  to  me. 
The  fluorescent  technique  followed  in 
the  preparation  of  the  karyotypes  is 
that  of  Helga  Muller.  UCLA  Medical 
Genetics  Unit.  Los  Angeles.  Califor- 
nia. This  work  was  supported  by  a 
Mental  Retardation  Training  Grant 
from  the  Departments  of  Psychiatry 
and  Medicine,  UCLA  Medical  School. 
Los  Anceles.  California. 


LITERATURE  CITED 


Arnason.  U.  1972.  The  role  of  chromo- 
siimal  rearrangement  in  mammalian  speci- 
alion  with  special  reference  lo  Celacea 
and  Pinnipedia.     Heredilas  70:113-118. 

Kulu.  D.  D.  1972.  Evolution  and  cyto- 
genetics. //;  S.  H.  Ridgway  (editor). 
Mammals  of  the  sea.  Biologv  and  medi- 
cine, p.  503-.'i27.  Charles  C.  Thomas. 
SpringHeld. 

Kulu,  D.  D.,  I.  Veomctt.  and  R.  S.  Sparkes. 
1971.  Cytogenetic  com.parison  of  four 
species  of  cetaceans.  J.  Mammal.  52' 
828-832. 


MFR  Paper  1051.  From  Marine  Fisheries  Review,  Vol. 
36,  No.  4,  April  1974.  Copies  of  this  paper,  in  limited 
numbers,  are  available  from  D83.  Tectinical  Information 
Division,  Environmental  Science  Information  Center, 
NCAA.  VJashington.  DC  20235. 


MFR  PAPER  1052 


Some  Physiological  Parameters  of  the 
Blood  of  the  California  Gray  Whale 


WILLIAM  G.  GILMARTIN,  RICHARD  W.  PIERCE, 
and  GEORGE  A.  ANTONELIS,  JR. 


ABSTRACT 

HciihUcK  ril.  (I  Oo-Hh  iliwiniiUinn  curve,  unci  hlood  vahinic  luivc  hccn  clctcr- 
niiiicil  fur  a  Ccilifoniiti  .y/'d.v  wIhiIc,  Eschrichtius  robustus.  ninl  ihc  results  arc 
compcircci  lo  sonic  physioloiiical  hlood  properties  of  other  celncccins.  The 
E.  robustus  hii\  n  hlooil  volume  that  is  similar  lo  values  esiiiinited  for  lari;e 
whales  hy  oilier  iiiilhors.  This  is  the  firsi  lime  isolopie  teehnicjiies  have  been  used 
to  determine  a  lariie  cetacean's  hlood  volume. 

Large  cetaceans  do  not  appear  to  follow  the  trend  of  most  lerreslerial  mammals 
when  the  body  size  and  P50  ure  compared.  The  P50  /'"'  the  E.  robustus  was  36.5  mm 
Hi;  and  is  the  hii>hest  reported  for  any  cetaccdii. 


The  determination  of  the  physio- 
logical properties  of  the  blood  of  large 
cetaceans  has  been  contined  primarily 
to  animals  that  are  stranded  or  have 
been  dead  for  many  hours  before 
blood  samples  can  be  drawn.  Lenfant 
(1964)  has  summarized  most  of  the 
data  available  on  marine  mammals. 
The  capture  and  maintenance  of 
Gigi.  a  California  gray  whale.  E\ch- 
richliiis    rohiistiis.    has    given    us    the 


opportunity,  for  the  first  time,  to  study 
a  large  cetacean  under  definable  con- 
ditions and  to  determine  its  blood 
volume  and  oxygen-hemoglobin  dis- 
sociation curves. 


METHODS 

On     two     separate     occasions     the 
whale  was  given   lO/jCi  of  radioiodin- 


Buth  William  G.  Giliiiartin  and 
George  A.  Antunelis,  Jr.  are 
with  the  Naval  Undersea  Center 
Bio-Svstenis  Program,  San  Di- 
ego, "CA  92132.  Richard  W. 
Pierce  is  with  the  Coastal  Ma- 
rine Laboratory,  Division  of 
Natural  Science,  University  of 
California.  Santa  Cruz,  CA 
95060. 

ated  human  serum  albumin  (Risa)'. 
The  labeled  compound  was  adminis- 
tered to  the  animal  in  one  of  the 
brachial  vessels  in  the  right  pectoral 
tin.  Two  blood  specimens  were  taken 
following  each  determination  to  insure 
that  mixing  was  complete  and  the 
albumin  was  not  being  eliminated 
rapidly  from  the  serum.  In  the  first 
test  (27  December  197 1 1  blood  vol- 
ume determination  samples  were  taken 
at  14  and  20  minute  intervals  and  in 
the  second  test  (6  March  1972)  were 
collected  at  10  and  IX  minute  intervals 
after  administration  of  (he  labeled 
compound.  The  blood  samples  re- 
moved tor  counting  were  taken  from 
one  oi  the  brachial  vessels  of  the  left 
pectoral  lin  and  put  into  well-hepann- 
ized  tubes.  Three  ml  of  the  heparinized 
whole  hlood  was  added  to  .^   ml  of   I 


'  Abbott  Laboratories,  Chicago,  Illinois.  Use 
of  trade  names  in  this  publication  does  not 
imply  endorsement  of  commercial  products 
by  the  National  fvlanne  Fisheries  Service. 


28 


Figure  1. — Oxyhemoglobin  dissociation  curves 
for  three  cetaceans  [T.  gilti.  G.  scammoni,  E. 
robustus).  All  curves  have  been  corrected  for 
pH  —  7.4  and  determined  at  37~C. 


percent  acetic  acid  to  iyse  the  red 
cells  to  permit  counting  of  a  uniform 
suspension  without  the  problems  as- 
sociated with  cells  settling  while  being 
counted.  A  standard  solution  was  pre- 
pared by  adding  a  fraction  of  a  milliliter 
of  the  same  solution  injected  into  the 
animal  to  saline  in  a  total  volume  of  1 
liter.  The  standard  was  prepared  for 
counting  by  the  same  procedure  as  the 
blood  specimens. 

All  samples  were  counted  for  100 
minutes  in  a  3-inch  well  Til  crystal 
attached  to  a  Packard  Model  2001 
Spectrometer  Sealer-timer.  Counts  of 
the  paired  blood  specimens  were  very 
close,  within  5  percent  in  December 
and  3  percent  in  March.  The  reported 
blood  volumes  are  the  mean  values 
of  the  respective  paired  samples.  The 
oxyhemoglobin  dissociation  curve  was 
determined  on  21  January  1972.  A 
20  ml  blood  sample  was  secured  from 
a  puncture  of  a  distal  brachial  vein 
the  the  pectoral  hn.  The  blood  was 
immediately  placed  into  well-heparin- 
ized  (250  units  heparin  per  10  ml 
blood)  plastic  test  tubes,  inverted  4  or 
5  times,  and  then  placed  in  an  ice  bath. 

Less  than  4  hours  after  collection 
the  dissociation  curve  was  completed 
by  a  Dissociation  Curve  Analyzer 
(DCA-1.  Radiometer,  Copenhagen). 
Duvelleroy  et  al.  (1970)  have  ex- 
plained in  detail  the  methodologs  in- 
volved in  the  operation  and  construc- 


tion of  the  02-Hb  dissociation  curves 
by  the  DCA-1.  Slight  changes  in  pH 
were  monitored  for  every  point  on 
the  dissociation  curve.  Because  Pqo 
changes  with  pH  variation,  corrections 
were  made  to  a  pH  of  7.4  with  the 
equation 


AlogPp^ 
ApH 


Bohr    effect. 


The    value    for    the    Bohr    effect    was 
obtained  from  Lenfant  ( 1969). 

The  hematocrit  (Hct)  was  obtained 
in  the  usual  manner.  A  Clay-Adams 
Autocrit  Centrifuge  was  the  instrument 
used. 

RESULTS 

The  hematocrit,  blood  volume,  and 
Pjo  of  the  E.  robitsius  as  well  as  cer- 
tain physiological  blood  parameters 
of  other  cetaceans  are  presented  in 
Table  1.  The  blood  volume  was  deter- 
mined on  two  occasions  and  the  oxy- 
gen binding  capacity  was  determined 
with  one  blood  sample.  Typical  sig- 
moid Oo-Hb  dissociation  curves  are 
shown  in  Figure  1.  Curves  for  two 
other  cetaceans.  Glohicephalci  scani- 
luoni  and  Tiirsiops  i;illi,  determined 
by  the  same  methods  (Antonelis.  1972)-' 
are  included. 

DISCUSSION 

The  hematocrit  of  Gigi  is  not  un- 
like that  measured  in  other  mammals. 
While  Lenfant  (1969)  asserts  that  this 
is  true  for  all  marine  mammals.  Ridg- 
way  and  Johnston  (1966).  Horvath  et 
al.  (1968).  and  Ridgway  et  al.  (1970), 
have  demonstrated  an  increased  packed 
cell  volume  in  some  of  the  small 
cetacea.  Lenfant  (1969)  attributes 
such  results  to  differences  in  technique 
or  in  physical  condition.  However, 
the  animals  who  showed  high  hemat- 
ocrits were  maintained  in  captivity. 
Had    they    followed    the    normal    pat- 


^  Antonelis,  G  A.  1972  Oj-Hb  dissociation 
curves  of  the  pilot  whale.  Globicephala  scam- 
mom,  and  Pacific  bottlenose  porpoise,  Tursiops 
gilti-     (Unpubl    manuscr,} 


tern  of  captive  animals,  the  values 
would  have  been  even  higher  if  sampled 
in  their  natural  environment.  It  has 
been  amply  demonstrated  that  animals 
brought  into  a  captive  situation  soon 
show  a  reduction  in  both  hetnatocrit 
and  hemoglobin  content  (Gilmartin 
and  Ridgway,    1969,^*  Lenfant,    1969). 

The  first  blood  volume  for  a  large 
cetacean  using  isotopic  methods  is 
reported.  Although  H^i  labeled  hu- 
man serum  albumin  was  used  in  the 
analysis,  the  similarity  of  the  paired 
blood  specimens  taken  at  each  test 
date  indicates  not  only  that  mixing 
was  complete,  but  also  that  this  foreign 
protein  was  not  being  eliminated  so 
rapidly  that  a  meaningful  blood  vol- 
ume determination  could  not  be  made. 
Unpublished  data  on  the  killer  whale 
are  included  also.  Both  animals  have 
blood  volumes  (£.  rohusuis:  6.1  and 
8.1  percent;  O.  onu:  8.2  percent) 
within  the  range  reported  for  other 
species  of  large  cetaceans;  Laurie 
(1933)  reported  a  large  blue  whale's 
blood  volume  as  6.6  percent.  Smith 
and  Pace  (1971)  estimate  that  the 
blood  and  body  fluids  of  large  ceta- 
ceans to  be  between  10  and  15  percent 
of  the  body  mass. 

Lawson  { 1962)  and  Sjiistrand  ( 1953, 
1962)  have  reviewed  the  many  factors 
which  affect  blood  volume  and  one 
should  be  aware  of  them  when  evaluat- 
ing blood  volume  data.  Since  the 
animal  is  placed  under  highly  stressful 
conditions  as  well  as  the  imposition 
of  unaccustomed  gravitational  forces 
as  a  result  of  removal  from  the  water, 
the  picture  for  marine  mammals  is 
complicated. 

Nutrition  and  electrolyte  balance 
also  affect  blood  volume.  To  our 
knowledge  neither  the  freezing  point 
depression  nor  the  osmolality  of  the 
urine  were  determined.  Osmolality 
can  be  calculated,  however,  using  the 
formulas  of  Wolf  (1958).  Gigi's  ex- 
clusive squid  diet  must  have  produced 
a  urine  whose  minimum  osmotic  con- 


3  Gilmartin,    W     G,    and    S     H  Ridgway       1969 

Some    physiological    properties  of    the    blood    of 

the       killer       whale,       Orcinus  orca-     (Unpubl, 
manuscr  ) 


29 


_C0     O   D) 
3  CL  - 


o  c  _ 

O  3  nr 

m  o  E^ 


O  >.^ 

T3  5   E 

'  rtJ  O 

:  do 

■  TO  ^ 

>  o  =r 
'       E 


in  en 


>fi  o  o 
(b  o  o> 

C-5   (D    1- 


cg  tt  o) 


'-  CO  en 

^    CM   en 


E    '   P  <U 
E       ^^ 


CD  (O 

1-   Ol 


to  CO  -- 

o 

o  -^ 

O    CO    CNi 

en  CO  fo 

CO 

en 

h-  to 

en  en 

in  o 
<0  eM 

en  en 


1-         CO  o 

m       r--  to 


(31   "^ 

in  t 


o  to  eD 

r^ 

o  a> 

o  CNj  -a- 
^  ^  -^j- 

en 

CO  en 

O  O  r^ 

r- 

C\J  O  CT> 

O  CO 

m  vD  ■<- 

■^     Tt     Tt 

eo 

■--    CO   00 

m  in  -^ 

r-  en 

in  in 

»-  c\j       m  oj 


x:  T3 
5-5 


S  5 
E  S 

a  c 

05  Q. 


C  3 

o  c 

E  £ 

E  5 

o  m 

O  Q 


—  o 

TO  C 


o  — 


£  ■? 
(I)  g 


nr  to  1^ 


TO  £ 
5  CO 
O)   > 


E   o   ^ 

III; 

c  5  ii  o - 5^  ; 


ccntration  was  1.670  milliOsniols/ 
liter.  The  effect  of  such  a  diet,  which 
is  isoosmotic  with  sea  water,  is  un- 
known. 

The  P50,  the  partial  pressure  (mm 
Hg)  of  oxygen  at  which  hemoglobin  is 
50  percent  saturated,  is  a  measure  of 
the  blood's  affinity  for  oxygen  —  the 
higher  the  P-m.  the  lower  the  affinity. 
The  P50  for  Gigi  was  36.5  mm  Hg  and 
is  the  highest  reported  for  any 
cetacean.  In  a  list  of  fifty  mammalian 
species  in  which  the  ^50  has  been  deter- 
mined, only  four  animals  exhibited  a 
higher  P50  (Bartels,  1971). 

Horvath  et  al.  (1968)  compared  the 
dissociation  curves  of  several  small 
cetacea  and  found  that  a  shift  to  the 
left,  or  increased  affinity  for  oxygen, 
relates  to  individual  species  behavior 
and  feeding  habits.  Apparently  this 
pattern  does  not  hold  for  the  larger 
cetaceans. 

In  looking  at  such  parameters  as 
hematocrit,  oxygen  capacity,  and  par- 
ticularly the  P^o-  a  pattern  emerges 
and  one  is  tempted  to  ascribe  this  to 
some  behavioral  characteristic  of  the 
animal.  However,  one  should  proceed 
with  caution. 

Oxygen  dissociation  curves  are  de- 
termined by  several  methods.  The 
method  used  by  Horvath  et  al.  (  l'^^68) 
was  to  treat  the  blood  with  varying 
levels  of  oxygen  and  sufficient  CO2 
to  maintain  a  pH  of  7.4.  I, enfant  (  1969) 
and  .Schmidt-Neilsen  and  Larimer 
(1958)  maintained  a  PcO'?  '^'f  -*•'  rnm 
Hg  in  determination  of  their  curves. 
■Schmidt-Neilsen  and  Larimer  (1958) 
observed  that  In  terrestrial  animals 
the  blood  of  the  larger  animals  has 
the  higher  affinity  for  oxygen  (low 
P.w).  Lenfant  (1969)  pointed  out  that 
this  does  not  hold  for  marine  mammals 
and  the  calculated  Pcm's  using  their 
formula  supports  this. 

.Steen  (1971)  has  pointed  out  that  a 
Pco2  '''  "^0  "I'll  Hg  may  not  repre- 
sent the  true  arterial  Pcoo  '-^^  ^^'^ 
animal,  e.g.,  a  cat  is  about  28  mm  Hg. 
.Since  the  ^002  ^^as  a  profound  effect 
on  the  Pm  and  the  magnitude  of  the 
Bohr  shift,  one  is  hard  put  to  make 
meanlnglul     comparisons     in     marine 


30 


mammals  when  different  methods  arc 
used.  To  compMcate  the  picture  fur- 
ther, Riggs  (I'JftO).  using  a  buffered 
system  at  a  pH  of  7.4.  observed  that 
animals  of  varying  size  had  identical 
Pso's  at  that  pH. 

In  order  to  make  meaningful  evalu- 
ations of  the  dissociation  curves  in 
marine  mammals,  the  in  vivo  ^002 
and  pH  need  to  be  determined.  Rieu 
and  Hamar  (1968)  point  out  the  dif- 
ficulties of  drawing  a  representative 
arterial  blood  sample  although  these 
arterial  data  have  been  collected  from 
one  species.  Tiirsiops  iruncalus,  by 
Ridgway  (1968).  In  short,  more  work 
needs  to  be  done. 

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS 

We  thank  k.  Suwa  and  E.  Wahren- 
brock  of  the  Anesthesia  Department. 
University  Hospital,  San  Diego,  Cali- 
fornia, for  making  the  Dissociation 
Curve  Analyzer  available  for  our  use. 
and  the  staff  of  .Sea  World  for  their 
cooperation. 

This  study  was  supported  in  parts 
by  grants  from  the  Oceanography 
Section  of  the  National  Science  Foun- 
dation (Grant  #GA-3I297)  and  the 
Bureau  of  Medicine  (Project  #MF- 
12524014). 


Ridgway,  S.  H.  1968.  The  botllcniise  dolphin 
in  biomedical  research.  In  W.  I.  Guy 
(editor).  Methods  of  animal  experimenta- 
tion. Vol.  .^.  p.  387-446.  Academic  Press, 
New  York. 

Ridgway,  S,  H,,  and  D,  G.  Johnston.  1966. 
Blood  oxygen  and  ecology  of  porpoises 
of  ihree  genera.  Science  (Wash.,  D.C.) 
15I:456-4.S8. 

Ridgwav,  S.  H.,  J.  G.  Simpson,  G.  S.  Patton. 
and  W.  G.  Gilmartin.  1970.  Hemato- 
logic findings  in  certain  small  cetaceans. 
J.  Am.  Vet.  Med.  Assoc.  l.';7:S66-575. 

Rieu,  M„  and  M.  Hamar.  1968.  Prelimi- 
nary results  concerning  the  gas  oT  arterial 
and  veinous  blood  in  Dcli'luiui.\  dclphu 
and  Sli'iR'llu  .vma.  Report  for  ONR, 
Contract  NF6 10527  l)006.V 

Riggs,  A.  1960.  The  nature  and  significance 
of  the  Bohr  effect  in  mammalian  hemo- 
globins. J.  Gen.  Physiol.  43:7,37-752. 

Schmidt-Neilsen,    K...    and    J.     L.     Larimer. 


1958.  Oxygen  dissociation  curves  of 
mammalian  blood  in  relation  to  body  size. 
Am.  J.  Physiol.  195:424-428. 

Sjostrand,  T.  1953.  Volume  and  distribu- 
tion of  blood  and  their  significance  in 
regulating  the  circulation.  Phvsiol.  Rev. 
33:202-228. 

.      1962.     Blood  volume.     In  W.  F. 

Hamilton  (editor).  Handbook  of  physiol- 
ogy. Circulation.  Sect.  2,  Vol.  1,  p.  51-62. 
Am.  Phvsiol.  Soc,  Wash.,  D.C. 

Smith.  A.  H..  and  N.  Pace.  1971.  Differ- 
ential component  and  organ  size  rela- 
tionships among  whales.  Environ.  Physiol. 
1:122-136. 

Sleen,  J.  B.  1971.  Comparative  physiology 
of  respiratory  mechanisms.  Academic 
Press,  Lond..  p.  109.112. 

Wolf,  A.  V.  1958.  Thirst  -  physiology  of 
the  urge  to  drink  and  problems  of  water 
lack.  Charles  C.  Thomas,  Springfield, 
p.  344-355. 


MFR  Paper  1052.  From  Marine  Fisheries  Review,  Vol. 
36,  No.  4.  April  1974.  Copies  of  this  paper.  In  limited 
numbers,  are  available  from  D83.  Tec  finical  Information 
Division,  Environmental  Science  Information  Center, 
NOAA.  Washington.  DC  20235. 


MFR  PAPER  1053 


Feeding  of  a  Captive  Gray  Whale, 
Eschrichtius  robustus 

G.  CARLETON  RAY  and  WILLIAM  E.  SCHEVILL 


LITERATURE  CITED 

Bartels,  H.  1971.  Blood  oxygen  dissocia- 
tion curves:  mammals.  In  P.  L.  Altman 
and  D.  S.  Dittmer  (editors).  Respiration 
and  circulation,  p.  196-197.  Biological 
Handbook.  Fed.  Am.  Soc.  Exp.  Biol., 
Bcthescda. 

Bernharl.  F.  W.,  and  L.  Skeggs.  1943.  The 
iron  content  of  crystalline  human  hemo- 
globin. J.  Biol.  Chem.  147:  19-22. 

Duvelleroy,  M.  A.,  R.  G.  Buckles,  S.  Rosen- 
kaimer.  C  Tung,  and  M.  B.  I. aver.  1970. 
An  oxyhemoglobin  dissociation  analyzer. 
J.  Appl.  Phvsiol.  28:227-233. 

Horvalh.  S.  M..  H.  Chiodi.  S.  H.  Ridgway. 
and  S.  Azar,  Jr.  1968.  Respiratory  and 
electrophoretic  characteristics  of  hemo- 
globin of  porpoises  and  sea  lion.  Comp. 
Biochem.  Physiol.  24: 1027-1033. 

Laurie.  A.  H.  1933.  Some  aspects  of  res- 
piratKtn  in  blue  and  fin  whales.  Discov- 
ery Rep.  7:363-406. 

Lawson.  H.  C.  1962.  The  volume  of 
blood  —  a  critical  examination  of  methods 
for  its  measurement.  In  W.  F.  Hamilton 
(editor).  Handbook  of  phvsiologv.  Circu- 
lation. Sect.  2,  Vol.  1,  p.  23-49.  Am. 
Physiol.Soc,  Wash.,  D.C. 

Lenfant,  C.  1969.  Physiological  properties 
of  blood.  In  H.  T.  Andersen  (editor). 
The  biology  of  marine  mammals,  p.  95- 
116.     Academic  Press.  New  York. 


ABSTRACT 

Ihc  fcc'diiii;  of  11  captive  yi'iirlini.;  ft'iiuilc  Eschrichtius  robustus  wirs  oliscrvcd 
wliilc  (II  villi;  with  Iwr  «.v  well  as  from  llw  surface.  Slie  sucked  food  off  the  lioliom 
wliile  \wiinniiiii;  lipped  over  ahinil  120"  so  ilnil  her  c /uiA  Ui/\  nearly  parallel 
to  the  lioUoni.  .An  increase  in  inoulli  viiluine  is  apparently  caused  by  action 
of  llie  toni;ue,  resulliui;  in  sironi;  suction,  dnriny;  wliich  ilie  lower  lip  is  opened 
and  food  enters  tlie  inoiit/i.  How  food  is  separated  from  water  and  mud  or 
detritus  is  not  l^nown.  Tlie  idiserved  f>eluivior  is  protial^ly  natural  and  illuminates 
earlier  records  oj  sionnuli  cinuents.  e.\teriuil  inarl\iiis;s.  and  asyninielrii  id 
haleeii.  Clearly,  iniuli  needs  to  he  learned  ahout  tlie  niecluuiisin  of  feeding;  of 
hideeii  wluiles.  I'liis  species'  feediiii;  liahits  nitiy  he  unic/ue  anioiii;  tliein. 


INTRODUCTION 

Observations  on  the  food  of  Escli- 
rielitius  rohustus  (Lilljeborg,  1861), 
the  gray  whale,  have,  been  summar- 
ized by  Zimushko  and  Lenskaya  ( 1970) 
and  Rice  and  Wolman  ( 1 97  1 ),  indicat- 
ing   that    the    diet    consists    predom- 


inantly of  benthic  animals,  moslK  am- 
phipods  and  a  few  other  crustaceans; 
incidental  items  include  polychaete 
worm  tubes,  shells,  gastropod  opercula, 
feathers,  kelp,  bits  of  wood.  sand, 
mud.  and  gravel.  Tomilin  (19.^7,  p. 
-346-347)     suueests     that     Eschrichtius 


r  o 
o  o 


~    0) 

o  a 
*  ° 


0)  z 


._■  o 
B  E 


2S 

o   S 


32 


G.  Carleton  Ray  is  with  The 
Johns  Hopkins  Univenity,  Bal- 
timore, MD  21205.  His"  work 
was  partly  supported  by  con- 
tracts to  the  University  from  the 
Office  of  Naval  Research  (Oce- 
anic Biologv).  contract  Nonr 
N00014-67-A-0I63-0010  03. 
William  E.  Schevill  is  with  the 
Museum  of  Comparative  Zool- 
ogy, Harvard  University,  and 
the  Woods  Hole  Oceanographic 
Institution,  Woods  Hole,  MA 
02543.  This  is  Contribution  No. 
3069  from  the  Woods  Hole 
Oceanographic  Institution.  His 
work  was  partly  supported  by 
the  Office  of  Naval  Research 
(Oceanic  Biologv),  contract 
Nonr  N00014-66-()241. 


is  to  some  extent  vegetarian  (which 
would  make  it  a  most  exceptional 
cetacean),  supposing  that  seaweed 
found  in  the  stomach  is  food  and  not 
merely  incidentally  swallowed.  Howell 
and  Huey  (1930)  found  the  planktonic 
Eiiplnuisiii  pacificu  in  the  baleen  of 
a  gray  whale  taken  off  northern  Cali- 
fornia on  21  July  1926.  Gilmore 
(1961.  p.  11)  gives  a  winter  observa- 
tion of  presumed  feeding  by  gray 
whales,  '"criss-crossing  thru  a  dense 
school  of  small  fish,  like  anchovies, 
off  San  Diego,"  and  Ken  Balcomb 
(pers.  comm.)  informs  us  that  a  gray 
whale  beached  15  miles  north  of 
Grays  Harbor.  Wash.,  in  April,  had 
a  gullet  packed  with  several  gallons 
of  OsnuTus  nionla.x  (rainbow  smelt). 
It  would  appear  that  EsclvicltiiKs  is 
not  limited  to  eating  small  benthic 
crustaceans,  but  will  also  eat  a  variety 
of  other  food  as  opportunity  offers. 
Gray  whales  seem  to  do  most  of 
their  feeding  in  the  Bering  and 
Chukchi  Seas  (Pike.  1962,  p.  831-8.32). 
Rice  and  Wolman  (1971.  p.  24-2,S) 
conclude  that  all  organisms  found 
in  the  stomachs  of  gray  whales  killed 
on  the  Arctic  summer  grounds  are 
"infaunal  benthic  species."  They  state 
that  95  percent  of  the  food  species 
found  in  one  Bering  Sea  sample  were 
gammaridean  aniphipods  6  to  25  mm 
long,  and  that  the  predominant  spe- 
cies from  this  sample,  Anipdiscu 
iiuicroi  cplnild.      "occurs      mainly     en 


sandy  bottoms  at  depths  of  5  to  300 
meters"  (italics  oursl.  Zimushko  and 
Lenskaya  (1970)  say  that  gray  whales 
feed  on  nectobenthos.  some  70  spe- 
cies in  all.  but  that  only  six  species  of 
amphipods  are  of  primary  importance. 
We  assume  that  though  such  active 
creatures  as  amphipods  may  be  in- 
faunal at  times,  their  well-known  ten- 
dency, when  disturbed,  to  move  just 
off  the  bottom,  would  make  them 
readily  available  to  a  sweeping  whale. 
One  of  us  (Ray)  observed  this  amphi- 
pod  behavior  from  a  submersible  in 
the  Bering  Sea  in  1972.  Nemoto 
(  1959)  has  discussed  probable  feeding 
behavior  of  whales  in  the  light  of 
mouth  shape  and  baleen  characteris- 
tics. During  the  last  century  many 
authors  have  alluded  to  gray  whales 
surfacing  with  mud  visible  on  the 
beak  or  other  dorso-lateral  parts.  Pike 
(1962.  p.  823)  cites  a  particularly 
illuminating  communication  from  Dr. 
F.  H.  Fay,  who  mentions  a  gray  whale 
supposed  to  be  feeding  in  5  fathoms: 
"As  this  whale  surfaced  close  to  the 
vessel,  mud  was  seen  washing  from 
its  back."  Although  Tomilin  (1957. 
p.  347)  supposes  that  these  whales 
may  actually  dig  their  mouths  into 
the  bottom,  scooping  and  plowing,  it 
seems  to  us  (see  below)  that  their 
behavior  and  anatomy  are  better 
adapted  to  sweeping  the  bottom  than 
for  digging;  this  accords  well  with 
the  evidence  of  asymmetrical  barnacle 
infestation  and  baleen  wear  reported 
by  Kasuya  and  Rice  (  1970). 

The  gray  whale  calf.  Gigi,  which 
was  captured  in  March  197  1  and 
kept  by  Sea  World.  San  Diego,  was 
initially  fed  an  artilicial  diet,  but  was 
soon  taught  to  eat  full-grown  squid. 
Lolii^o  npulesccns.  By  the  time  of  our 
observations  (28  January- 1  February 
and  1  1  March  1972).  her  daily  diet 
was  900  kg  of  squid,  dropped  frozen 
into  her  tank  in  9  kg  blocks,  and  her 
weight  gain  was  almost  40  kg  a  day. 
Our  behavioral  observations  were 
made  both  from  the  water's  surface 
and  by  scuba-diving  with  Gigi.  We 
also  used  underwater  motion  pictures 
made   h\   John   .Seeker   of  Sea   World 


when  Gigi  was  about  6  months  old. 
To  aid  in  our  interpretation,  we  have 
consulted  her  trainers  (Bud  Donahoo 
and  Susan  Bailey),  and  we  have  solicit- 
ed observations  on  Gigi  and  on  other 
gray  whales  from  several  of  our  col- 
leagues. To  them,  who  are  mentioned 
below,  to  the  Naval  Undersea  Center, 
and  to  the  management  of  Sea  World, 
we  are  grateful. 


BEHAVIORAL  OBSERVATIONS 

Before  detailing  our  observations, 
we  remind  the  reader  that  a  gray 
whale's  head  is  roughly  triangular  in 
cross  section,  the  gular  region  being 
the  base  while  the  cheeks  form  the 
sides,  sloping  inwards  at  about  60° 
towards  the  narrow  beak-like  upper 
jaw.  The  curved  mouth  is  at  about 
the  middle  of  the  cheeks.  The  mouth 
has  effectively  only  lower  lips;  the 
upper  lips  are  represented  by  the 
rabbet-like  recess  above  the  gum  line 
into  which   the  lower  lips  fit   snugly. 

In  the  course  of  teaching  Gigi  to 
eat  squid,  trainers  Donahoo  and  Bai- 
ley taught  her  to  relax  the  edge  of  the 
left  lower  lip  and  turn  it  outward  in 
response  to  light  taps  on  the  head. 
Food  was  placed  by  hand  in  the  open- 
ing thus  created,  passing  into  the 
throat  either  through  or  under  the 
baleen.  This  was  in  contrast  to  the 
feeding  of  the  artificial  liquid  diet, 
when  the  jaws  were  opened  while 
accepting  the  feeding  tube;  during  the 
hand-feeding  of  squid,  the  jaws  re- 
mained closed  and  the  lip  was  opened. 
as  was  also  the  case  later  on  when  one 
of  us  thrust  an  arm  down  her  pharynx. 
Training  Gigi  to  move  her  lip  volun- 
tarily was  critical,  for  normally  the 
lip  was  held  so  tightly  shut  that  a  man 
could  not  forcibly  pry  it  open.  This 
training  was  done  while  she  was 
grounded  in  the  tank  almost  empty 
of  water;  it  was  not  long  before  she 
would  thus  accept  food  while  swim- 
ming. Soon  thereafter  she  was  feeding 
freely  without  the  aid  of  her  trainers. 
Gigi  was  always  fed  from  the  left  side 
(Donahoo  has  mentioned  having  been 


i2> 


34 


o 


5  * 

in    n 

3  — 


a  o 


35 


o  n 
|« 

0)     ■ 


tg 


n 


36 


a  horsLMiian  before  hecoming  acquaint- 
ed with  whales),  which  may  account 
tor  the  left-sided  sweeping  behavior 
described  below;  Kasuya  and  Rice 
(1970)  reported  that  of  34  gray 
whales  that  they  investigated,  3  1  were 
right-sided. 

We  observed  that  the  edges  of  the 
lips  could  be  turned  out  and  down 
through  about  60°,  either  one  or 
both  sides  at  a  time.  Motion  pictures 
further  show  a  fluttering  of  the  pos- 
terior part  of  this  edge  during  hand- 
feeding,  especially  near  the  major 
flexure. 

Voluntar\  feeding  was  as  follows: 
The  frozen  blocks  of  squid  floated  at 
the  surface  and,  as  they  thawed, 
the  squid  mostly  sank  slowly  to  the 
bottom.  Gigi  often  "nibbled"'  at  the 
thawing  corners  of  the  blocks,  using 
the  left  side  of  her  mouth  and  usually, 
but  not  always,  holding  the  block  at 
about  the  place  where  the  fluttering 
had  been  noted.  The  nibbling  was  oc- 
casionally accompanied  by  a  noisy 
pulsation  called  "earthquaking"  by  the 
trainers,  and  splashing  or  jetting  of 
water  and  air  for  nearly  half  a  meter 
(Figures  1  and  2).  The  jet  was  usually 
at  this  same  place  near  the  after  end  of 
the  mouth,  but  it  sometimes  ran  nearly 
the  entire  length  of  the  baleen  (not 
quite  to  the  forward  end  of  the  mouth). 
Often  the  jetting  was  on  both  sides 
of  the  mouth.  When  Gigi's  mouth  was 
at  the  surface,  air  was  involved  in  the 
jetting,  but  not  always  when  her 
mouth  was  completely  submerged,  and 
not  at  all  when  she  was  on  the  bottom 
of  the  tank.  We  assume  that  this  air 
was  adventitiously  taken  in.  as  in 
eating  soup. 

After  most  of  the  squid  had  fallen 
to  the  bottom  of  the  tank.  Gigi's  be- 
havior altered  markedly.  As  she  ap- 
proached them,  she  would  roll  over 
toward  her  back  some  120°,  so  that 
her  cheek  was  nearly  parallel  to  the 
bottom  and  about  10-20  cm  above  it. 
As  she  swam  over  the  squid,  she  left 
a  clean  swath  30-50  cm  wide.  It  was 
apparent  that  the  squid  were  being 
sucked  up  in  a  sort  of  pulsation,  as 
some    squid    briefly    reappeared    after 


their  first  disappearance  into  her 
mouth.  It  is  presumed  that  she  could 
easily  see  the  squid  lying  in  her  path. 
In  the  cylindrical  tank  she  described 
a  track  slightly  dorsad  of  straight 
ahead,  so  that  she  swept  over  the  squid 
at  about  a  30°  angle  to  the  mouth 
(Figures  3  and  4).  Then  three  separate 
actions  were  seen:  (  1 )  an  opening  of 
the  edge  of  the  mid  to  posterior  part 
of  the  left  lip  so  as  to  fold  it  away 
from  the  baleen.  (2)  a  swelling  of  the 
gular  region  and  expansion  of  the 
gular  grooves  (Figure  4).  and  (3)  an 
opening  of  the  right  side  of  the  mouth, 
during  which  squid  were  sometimes 
jetted  out.  The  third  item  may  merely 
mean  that  it  is  easier  to  open  both 
sides  of  the  mouth  symmetrically, 
though  Gigi  had  showed  us  that  she 
could  flex  her  lips  one  side  at  a  time. 
Since  we  could  not  see  all  these  parts 
of  the  whale  at  once,  we  can  only  infer 
the  presumable  sequence  of  these  re- 
lated events.  Then  Gigi  righted  herself 
and  swam  away;  sometimes  turbid 
jets  could  be  seen  pulsing  from  both 
sides  of  her  mouth. 

ANATOMICAL 
INTERPRETATION 

Our  understanding  of  the  mecha- 
nisms involved  is  hampered  by  our 
ignorance  of  the  myology  and  other 
soft  anatomy  of  this  species.  We  have 
been  able  to  find  only  osteological 
anatomical  descriptions  and  have  had 
no  carcass  available  for  even  rough 
dissection.  W.  C.  Cummings  and  J. 
Sweeney  made,  on  our  account,  some 
exploratory  sections  of  the  lower  lips 
of  dead  neonates  found  on  the  beaches 
of  Laguna  Ojo  de  Liebre,  Baja  Cali- 
fornia, and  found  them  to  be  well 
muscled.  D.  W.  Rice  reminds  us  that 
the  tongue  is  also  well  muscled,  much 
more  so  than  in  Btilucnopicni;  it  is 
well  figured  and  described  by  Andrews 
(1914,  p.  254.  pi.  2  1.  fig.  4.  and  pi.  22, 
fig.  6). 

All  this,  as  well  as  observations  of 
behavior,  strongly  indicates  that  the 
gray  whale's  oral  anatomy  is  adapted 
for   suction    and    thai    motion    of   the 


lips  is  voluntary.  We  had  but  limited 
opportunity  to  manipulate  Gigi's 
mouth  ourselves;  one  of  us  (Schevill) 
had  his  arm  in  her  mouth  several  times 
while  she  was  "earthquaking"  and 
could  feel  no  motion  at  all  of  the 
tongue  and  only  a  slight  agitation 
near  the  larynx.  But  W.  E.  Evans  (in 
litt.)  states  that  "the  tongue  cannot  be 
pulled  back  and  forth  very  easily; 
however,  it  can  be  raised  high,  dis- 
placing a  reasonably  good  percentage 
of  the  volume  of  the  mouth  cavity". 
Donahoo  had  his  hand  in  Gigi's  mouth 
repeatedly;  both  he  and  Evans  have 
emphasized  the  tongue's  strength  and 
mobility.  Donahoo  asserts  that  it 
moves  so  as  virtually  to  vacate  the 
oral  cavity  and  that  this  involves  a 
shape  change.  He  further  asserts  that 
the  shape  change  travels  rearward 
and  that  this  movement  of  the  "ball" 
of  the  tongue  can  be  seen  from  outside, 
as  the  gular  grooves  expand.  This 
posteriorly  moving  expansion  of  the 
gular  region  was  also  seen  by  one  of 
us  (Ray)  underwater.  Further,  Dona- 
hoo said  that  as  the  tongue  moves  back, 
a  strong  inflow  appears  at  the  out- 
folded  lip.  He  added  that  Gigis 
feeding  was  not  simply  accepting, 
but  quite  selective.  When  presented 
a  mixture  of  squid,  "Pacific  mackerel  " 
(chub  mackerel,  Scomhcr  juponiciis). 
and  "whitebait"  (probably  jacksmelt. 
Atlu'iinopsi\  culiforiiiciisis.  or  top- 
smelt.  Alhcrinops  affinis).  all  three 
were  sucked  from  the  bottom,  but 
only  squid  were  retained,  the  others 
being  rejected. 

CONCLUSIONS 

Nothing  benthic  of  the  size  of  squid 
has  been  reported  in  the  diet  of 
Eschiichlius.  so  we  should  be  cautious 
in  interpreting  this  captive's  feeding 
style  as  indicative  of  natural  behavior 
of  the  species,  bearing  in  mind  that 
Gigi  was  completely  isolated  from  her 
kind  throughout  captivity.  Neverthe- 
less, her  bottom-sweeping  habit  we 
suppose  may  be  natural,  since  it  ap- 
pears appropriate  for  catching  the 
animals    that    comprise    the    recorded 


37 


natural  food  of  this  species  of  whale. 
Our  captive's  habit  of  sweeping  a  few 
centimeters  off  the  smooth  tank  bot- 
tom does  not  deny  the  probabilits 
that  sweeping  a  soft  or  irregular 
bottom  at  sea  could  get  mud  on  the 
sweeper's  back  (cf.  Fay  in  Pike,  1962. 
p.  823),  especially  if  the  prey  is 
actually  benthic. 

Cetological  literature  is  full  of  poor- 
ly supported  conjecture,  and  we  hesi- 
tate to  add  more.  Although  we  have 
learned  a  number  of  things  from  the 
captive  Gigi,  there  is  still  much  un- 
known. For  one  thing,  her  jetting 
water  in  pulses  from  a  particular  re- 
stricted part  of  her  mouth  seems  to 
imply,  perhaps,  a  special  activity  of 
the  tongue.  Furthermore,  we  do  not 
understand  the  mechanics  of  the  hy- 
draulics that  bring  the  food-bearing 
water  into  the  mouth.  This  is  no  mys- 
tery in  whales  that  swim  along  with 
the  mouth  wide  open,  but  it  is  not  so 
obvious  in  a  whale  which  swims  along 
rather  slowly  with  only  a  narrow  slit 
open,  as  did  our  Esclirichiius.  Here  it 
seems  necessary  to  increase  the  volume 
of  the  mouth  to  cause  useful  inflow  of 
water.  We  are  handicapped  by  our 
imperfect  understanding  of  the  func- 
tions of  the  muscular  tongue.  W.  E. 
Evans  (pers.  comm.)  has  told  us  that 
Gigi's  tongue  once  pressed  his  hand 
painfully  hard  against  her  palate.  Such 
pressure  might  serve  to  push  the  gular 
region  downward,  enlarging  the  mouth 
cavity,  and  this  idea  fits  with  the  ob- 
servations of  Donahoo  and  Ray  of 
the  migrating  tongue-bulge  visible 
from  beneath. 

Thus  we  suppose,  from  the  assorted 
evidence,  the  following  concatenation 
of  events  in  feeding;  First  the  whale 
rolls  over  far  enough  so  that  the  cheek 
is  about  parallel  with  the  bottom,  and 
the  lip  is  opened  as  the  tongue,  press- 
ing against  the  palate,  pushes  the  gular 
region  away  so  that  it  expands,  pro- 
ducing an  inflow  which  brings  in  the 
epibenthic  food.  Then  the  tongue 
rcla.xes  and  the  gular  musculature 
tightens,  reducing  the  size  of  the 
mouth  cavity  and  expelling  water; 
the    food    IS    trapped    in    the    baleen 


fringes.  We  do  not  know  exactl>  what 
happens  next;  perhaps  a  slight  re- 
newed suction  of  water  removes  the 
food  from  the  baleen  fringes,  and 
swallowing  presumably  follows. 


LITERATURE  CITED 

Andrews.  R.  C.      1^*14,     Monographs  of  the 

Pacific   cetacea.     I.     The   California   gray 

whale      {RInuhtanccU's      tiUmcita      Cope). 

Mem.  Am.  Mus.  Nat.  Hist.  (New   Series) 

1:2:7-287. 
Gilmore,    R.    M.      1961.     The    story    of   the 

gray  whale.  2ncJ  ed.     Privately  published. 

San  Diego.  17  p. 
Howell,  A.  B.,  and  L.  M.  Huey.      1930.  Food 

of  the  gray  and  other  whales.     J.  Mammal. 

11:321-322. 
Kasuya,  T.,  and  D.  W.  Rice.      1970.     Notes 

on   baleen   plates   and  on  arrangement   of 


parasitic  barnacles  of  gray  whale.  Sci. 
Rep.  Whales  Res.  Inst.  22:39-43. 

Nemoto,  T.  19?9.  Food  of  baleen  whales 
with  reference  to  whale  movements.  Sci. 
Rep.  Whales  Res.  Inst.  14: 149-290. 

Pike.  G.  C.  1962.  Migration  and  feeding 
of  the  gray  whale  {E.\chruhiiiis  nihhusiis). 
J.  Fish.  Res.  Board  Can.  19:815-838. 

Rice.  D.  W.,  and  A.  A.  Wolman.  1971. 
The  life  history  and  ecology  of  the  gray 
whale  (E.schnchtius  nihusius).  Am.  Soc. 
Mammal..  Spec.  Publ.  No.  3.  142  p.,  18 
tables.  38  text  figs. 

Tomilin,  A.  G.  1957.  Kitoobraznye.  Zveri 
SSSR  i  prilezhashchikh  stran  (Cetacea. 
Mammals  of  the  USSR  and  adjacent  coun- 
tries.) 9.  756  p.  (Engl,  transl.  Smithson. 
Inst.,  1967.9,717  p.) 

Zimushko.  V.  V.,  and  S.  A.  Lenskaya.  1970. 
O  pitanii  serogo  kila  (Eschrichinis  gib- 
hosiis  Erx.)  na  mestakh  nagula  (Feeding 
of  the  gray  whale  [E.schnclunis  nihhosiis 
Erx.)  at  foraging  grounds).  Fkologiya 
Akad.  Nauk  SSSR  l(3):26-35.  (Engl, 
transl..  Consultants  Bureau.  Plenum  Publ. 
Corp.,  1971.  Fkologiya  1(3):205-212.) 


MFR  Paper  1053.  From  Marine  Fisheries  Review,  Vol. 
36,  No.  4,  April  1974.  Copies  of  this  paper,  in  limited 
numbers,  are  available  from  D83.  Technical  Information 
Division.  Environmental  Science  Information  Center. 
NCAA.  Washington.  DC  20235. 

MFR  PAPER  1054 

Sounds  Produced  by  the  Gray  Whale, 
Eschrichtius  robustus 

JAMES  F.  FISH,  JAMES  L  SUMICH,  antj  GEORGE  L.  LINGLE 

ABSTRACT 

U ndcrwawr  \iiuihIs  pnuliKcil  hy  a  yniiiii;  cupiivc  yn/y  uluilc  arc  described. 
A  "iucudUc-\t>it}idiiii>  pulsed  signal."  consisliiiii  of  H  lo  14  pulses  in  hursts  Uisliui; 
up  Id  2  sec  was  the  niosl  c<>nuiu>n  vocalization.  Other  souitds  included  a  low- 
frequency  "i;ro\\l"  or  "moan."  similar  lo  a  sound  recorded  from  L;ray  w/iales  at 
sea:  a  short,  hroiulhand.  "i;riinllike"  sound:  a  low-piit  hed  "hlowluile  rumble": 
aiul  a  loui;  "ntctaUic-souiuliui;  pulse  train"  tlial  meiiicd  into  a  low-frequency 
"Kroan."  The  sounds  ctnild  not  be  correlaled  with  specific  behaviors.  Also  de- 
scribed are  "clicks"  recorded  in  the  presence  of  the  whale  wlien  site  was  returned 
to  \ea  ami  similar  "iliiks"  recorded  from  i;ray  whales  in  liii  kaninnish  Bay. 
I'ancoin  er  Island.  Caitoila. 


This  report  describes  a  variets  of 
sounds  recorded  from  Gigi,  a  young 
gray  whale.  Eschrichtius  robustus. 
while  she  was  in  captivity  at  Sea 
World,  a  marine  park  in  San  Diego, 
Calif.,    and    sounds    recorded    in    the 


vicinits  of  the  whale  when  she  was 
returned  to  the  ocean  nearly  a  year 
later.  Also  described  are  the  sounds 
recorded  in  the  presence  of  gray 
whales  in  Wickaninnish  Bay,  Van- 
couver Island.  Canada. 


38 


Table  1. — Summary  o(  previously  published  data  on  gray  whale  sounds. 


Eberhardt 
&  Evans. 
1962 


Painter.  1963 

iWenz.  1964 

Rasmussen  &  Head.  1965 

2Gales.  1966 

Hubbs,  1966 

Asa-Donan  &  Perkins.  1967 

Cummings  et  al  ,  1968 


Poulter.  1968 


Pulse 

Repetition 

Pulse 

Peak 

Duration 

Frequency 

Pulses  per 

rate 

duration 

energy 

Signal  type 

(sec) 

(Hz) 

burst 

(per  sec) 

(msec) 

(Hz) 

"Croaker-hke 

40-700 

80-300 

grunts" 

■Low-frequency 

40-700 

80-300 

rumbles  ' 

"Pulses" 

4-6 

100 

"Low-pitched 

4-9  pulses 

Approx    33 

11 

grunting" 

per  grunt 

"Clicks" 

<200->3.000 

10 

No  sounds 

"Clicks- 

<200->3,000 

10 

No  sounds 

"Ectiolocation- 

70-3.000 

5-22 

3-7 

1-15 

400-800 

like  pulses" 

"Variable 

whistles" 

"Moans" 

1  5 

20-200 

"Underwater 

Approx.  1 

15-175 

<1C0 

blow" 

"Bubble-type 

0  7 

15-305 

sounds" 

"Knocks" 

to  350 

"Croak-like 

grunts" 

"Rumbles" 

"Cries" 

"Grunting" 

"Rasping" 

1  to  several 

"Pulses" 

5-18 

"Chirps" 

2-5 

8 

"Bong" 

"Clicks" 

to  12,000 

3-5 

'■-  Both  references  show  data  on  sounds  recorded  by  Asa-Donan  in  1955 


Vocalizations  have  been  recorded 
from  migrating  gray  wiiales  off  the 
southern  California  coast  (Wenz,  1964. 
and  Gales.  1966.  both  reporting  on 
recordings  made  by  P.  V.  Asa-Dorian 
in  1955;  Asa-Dorian  and  Perkins. 
1967:  Cummings.  Thompson,  and 
Cook.  196S)  and  from  gray  whales 
in  the  lagoons  of  Baja  California. 
Mexico,  where  the  whales  breed 
(Eberhardt  and  Evans.  1962;  Painter. 
1963;  Poulter.  1968).  Unsuccessful 
attempts  to  obtain  sounds  from  gray 
whales  off  southern  California  and 
in  the  lagoons  have  been  made  by 
Rasmussen  and  Head  (1965)  and  by 
Hubbs  (1966).  The  published  data 
on  gray  whale  sounds  are  summarized 
here  in  Table  1 . 

Gigi  had  already  been  in  captivity 
at  Sea  World  and  hand-fed  by  her 
trainer  for  about  2  months  before  the 
tank  recordings  were  made.  Although 


she  seemed  quite  content  in  her  un- 
natural surroundings,  her  behavior 
was  certainly  not  representative  of  a 
free-ranging  gray  whale  of  the  same 
age.  Hence,  the  sounds  may  or  may 
not  be  similar  to  sounds  emitted  by  a 
young  gra\  whale  in  its  natural  en- 
vironment. A  second  problem  with 
any  tank  recording  is  the  effect  of 
tank  resonance  and  reverberation  on 
the  physical  characteristics  of  the 
sounds.  Certain  frequencies  were 
probably  accentuated  in  amplitude 
and  extended  in  time.  Nevertheless, 
the  data  at  least  represent  the  general 


James  F.  Fish  is  with  the  Naval 
Undersea  Center,  San  Diego, 
CA  92132.  James  L.  Sumich  is 
with  Grossmont  College,  El 
Cajon,  CA  92020.  George  L. 
Lingle  is  with  SEACO,  Inc.  al 
the  Naval  Undersea  Center,  San 
Diego,  CA  92132. 


frequency  range  and  variety  of  a 
young  captive  gray  whales  sound 
emissions. 

SOUNDS  OF  GIGI 
AT  SEA  WORLD 

Sounds  were  recorded  simultane- 
ously in  water  and  in  air  on  a  2-track 
tape  recorder  (Uher  4200)'  at  19 
cm/sec.  The  hydrophone  (Wilcoxon 
M-H90-A).  connnected  to  one  chan- 
nel of  the  recorder,  was  suspended  1 
m  above  the  bottom  of  the  circular 
concrete  tank  (11  m  wide  X  4  m 
deep).  The  frequency  response  of  the 
underwater  recording  system  was  40 
Hz  to  16  kHz.  ±.^  dB.  The  micro- 
phone, connected  to  the  other  channel. 
was  lowered  over  the  lip  of  the  tank 


'  Use  of  trade  names  in  this  publication  does 
not  imply  endorsement  of  commercial  products 
by     the     National      Marine     Fisheries     Service. 


39 


ap  13A31  3Aii\n3a 


i 

A>. 

.^ 

'«' 

:A 

ilK 

1 

uii 

^ 

iu 

^. 

,  (, 

^ 

.   u 

il. 

i  ij 

^A. 

1  ill 

ap   -\3H31  3AllV13a 


J* 


\' 


ap  '13A31  3Ali\n3i) 


(Qi 


zHi  AONSnOaaj 


I       1       I       I  ■  1-' 

O                O                O                O  ^ 

»        -i        <>i        -  ° 

ZH>1    A3N3n03dJ 


..'.'*1 


4  "O   CO 

=  <  ^ 

0  a  a 

oil 

.  »  c 

Q  a  - 

*  c 

?|S 

ON* 
«Z   « 

-     ^  "O 

i"i 

li! 
s  s  ° 

ogf 
■  °-S 

>  =  Siu 
=  "Si, 

«    O    0)  g 

■»  ^  •"    - 
3o  5" 

O"  S  -S  w 
£*?£ 

1  Eo 

o  51  S 
«  -^  o  t 

o   *  =  « 

=  =i§~ 

5  2  »< 

•  a.  ». 

=  s  ^s 

*  =  £  o 
CD         CM 

.■?:£ 

-_  •E  so 

i>.S.£ 

2  ■■TJ 

E  £  =  o 

k  «  .  0) 
o  >  E  a 

:    51  £• 

a.- "I 


£  J: 


ap    "I3A31  3AliV13d 


ap   13A31  3AUW13U 


§=  *  <:' 

i  g  »■- 

i  3  2  i? 

*  0)  a> 

rf  T  O)  > 

o  —  «  o 

-  ?      o 

•=  E  " 

.^S  S  E 


1   ■ 


'^ 


M 

li>l 


.it*. 


bJ 


(W) 


I! 


'H>l    ADN3n03dd 


•  E  *-o 

—  (0  a  - 
'  ±:  (0  -o 

—  » 
■  2  uj  « 

H  3  "5  a 

J?  Q-  £  3 

Q.         <0 

•Oct.* 
•n  c  o  « 
c6     -  * 

«  =o  « 

—  2     -  c 

—  O    0»    <D 

«j  —   <o  o 

Ills 

0  '  _  — 
i  .  ffl  o 
u  ul  ::  in 
«  u  C^J 

a-    J  „ 

1  —    o  ^ 

^  E  5  o 
/t.  2  ""  .= 

u.  x:  (O  .E 


JHI  'A0N3nC)3aJ 


zm   A3N3n03aj 


aP    13A31  3AliW13a 


CO) 


(y) 


SP    13A31  3AliV13a 


OD 


..^•■4 

•— ' 

i 

-  *   .  ti 

lA 

iU     -,j 

I'm 

•  A   •      ' 

->■ 

-.A. 

1 

;  .: 

V 

. 

'*!* 

•  ir. 

^  , 

r.. 

- 

v: 

1  - 

-  .  . 

—  ■•    ' 

'f^ 

■At 

^^ 

m.   * 

J) 

-'! 

-4 

4 

1 

is- 

^  ^  o 
o  > 


.  *"  * 

o2  a 

=  I  o 

OT>  = 

o  £  o 

tM  -O  Q 

3    0>      ■ 

o  C  Ul 

^    N      ■ 
<Q    >•  C 


m 

(0 

a 
F 

o 

Q. 
>> 

10 

o 

«) 

u 

£- 

0) 

o> 

« 

E 

o 

■o 

rn 

b 

? 

r> 

o 

T 

o 

(B 

<a 

t 

c 

3 

C 

a 

o 

o 

(0 

3 
« 

c 
* 
'3 

c 
a 

« 

a 

Ta 

1- 

« 

F 

n 

c 

3 

T 

S! 

« 

C 

(A 

o 

w 

o 

C 

o 

(D 

~ 

E 

n 

o 
in 

a 

V 

« 

c 

<A 

_ 

£ 

£ 

c 

ij 

S 

■D 

■o 

« 

r 

n 

O 

■D 
« 

(D 

lij 

o 

r 

« 

£ 

c 

« 

*  "O 

w 

r 

5 

JC 

u 

< 

01 

u. 

|8|.s 


_    O)  C    (0 

«  c  —  _ 


a  a,  o 
<  oi£  -o 

I     :    n    » 


5  «  "  •* 


aP    13A31  3Ali\/13a 


im  AONsnOsdd 


n3A33  3Ali\n3M 


to  record  the  commentary  of  the 
trainer  in  the  tank  with  the  whale. 
The  3-hr  recording  session  began 
about  I  hour  before  a  feeding  period 
and  lasted  until  the  water  level,  which 
initially  was  about  I  m  above  the 
whales  back,  was  too  low  to  make 
useful  underwater  recordings. 

■Speclrographic  analyses  were  made 
in  the  laboratory  with  a  "Vibralyzer" 
(Kay  Electric  Company)  to  determine 
frequency  vs.  time,  and  a  real-time 
spectrum  analyzer  (Spectral  Dynam- 
ics SD330)  connected  to  an  X-Y  re- 
corder (Hewlett  Packard  7035B)  to 
portray  the  relative  amplitude  vs. 
frequency.  The  waveforms  were  moni- 
tored with  either  the  spectrum  an- 
alyzer in  the  Scope  Time  mode  or  an 
external  oscilloscope.  All  of  the 
sounds  described  below  were  recorded 
from  the  hydrophone  output. 

The  whale  was  very  inactive  and 
emitted  no  sounds  until  the  water  was 
lowered  enough  for  the  trainer  to 
stand  in  the  tank  and  touch  her  back. 
None  of  the  sounds  could  be  consist- 
ently associated  with  a  particular 
behavior.  However,  one  type,  a  "me- 
tallic-sounding pulsed  signal."  was 
emitted  nearly  every  time  the  trainer 
tapped  the  whale  lightly  on  the  back. 

A  low-frequency  "growl"  or  "moan." 
similar  to  one  type  of  sound  recorded 
from  gray  whales  off  San  Diego. 
Calif.,  by  Cummings  et  al.  (1968). 
was  produced  twice  during  the  re- 
cording session.  The  principal  energy 
of  this  signal  recorded  from  the  cap- 
tive animal  was  in  a  band  from  100 
to  200  Hz,  with  a  secondary  peak 
around  1.5  kHz  (Figure  lA).  The 
duration  of  the  sound  was  just  over  1 
sec.  There  was  no  obvious  movement 
of  the  blowholes  or  expulsion  of  air 
associated  with  this  vocalization. 

The  most  common  sound  was  the 
"metallic-sounding  pulsed  signal" 
which  consisted  of  8  to  14  pulses  in 
bursts  lasting  up  to  2  sec  (Figure  IB). 
The  pulses  had  sharp  fronts  (fast 
rise  times)  with  energy  extending  from 
below  100  Hz  to  over  10  kHz.  and 
several  resonant  peaks,  the  strongest 
being  at   1.4  kHz.  This  sound  occurred 


as  often  as  five  times  a  minute,  even 
when  not  incited  by  the  trainer.  Only 
occasionally  did  it  appear  to  be  cor- 
related with  exhalation  and  move- 
ment of  the  blowholes. 

Three  times  during  the  recording 
session,  a  short  (0.2  sec),  broadband, 
"gruntlike"  sound  (Figure  IC)  was 
emitted,  without  movement  of  the 
blowholes.  Its  peak  energy  was  cen- 
tered at  200-400  Hz  and  1 .6  kHz. 

Figure  ID  shows  the  underwater 
sounds  of  an  exhalation  followed  by 
a  low-pitched,  "blowhole  rumble." 
This  combination  occurred  several 
times. 

Twice,  a  long  "metallic-sounding 
pulse  train"  with  a  repetition  rate  of 
about  14  pulses/sec  merged  into  a 
long,  low-frequency  "groan"  after 
about  1.5  sec  (Figure  IE).  Except  for 
the  much  faster  pulse  repetition  rale, 
the  first  part  of  this  vocalization  was 
similar  to  the  sound  shown  in  Figure 
IB. 

Numerous  other  sounds  produced 
by  Gigi  during  the  3-hr  recording 
session  essentially  were  variations  of 
one  of  the  five  types  discussed  above. 

SOUNDS  RECORDED  DURING 
RELEASE  OF  GIGI 

Unfortunately,  we  did  not  record 
again  in  the  presence  of  Gigi  until 
she  was  released  on  13  March  1972. 
The  recording  and  analysis  system 
used  for  these  data  was  the  same  as 
used  at  Sea  World.  Shortly  after  Gigi 
was  lowered  into  the  water  from  the 
barge  that  carried  her  out  to  sea, 
long  trains  of  "clicks"  were  heard. 
Although  at  the  time  there  was  no 
wa>  to  determine  if  these  sounds, 
which  were  unlike  any  recorded  from 
Gigi  at  Sea  World,  actually  came 
from  the  whale  or  from  another  un- 
seen biological  source  in  the  area,  we 
now  believe  they  were  emitted  by  Gigi. 
The  clicks  were  nearly  identical  to  the 
clicks  we  have  recently  recorded  in 
the  presence  of  gra\  whales  in  Wick- 
aninnish  Bay,  Vancouver  Island.  Can- 
ada. 


The  clicks  recorded  in  the  presence 
of  Gigi  are  shown  in  Figure  2.  Their 
principal  energy  occupied  a  band 
from   about   2   to   6   kHz,   centered   at 

3.4  to  4.0  kHz.  Click  duration  was  I 
to  2  msec.  Eight  minutes  and  15  sec 
after  the  whale  entered  the  water 
most  boats  in  the  area  shut  down  their 
engines  for  our  recording.  The  first 
burst  of  29  clicks  was  recorded  6  sec 
later.  Three  minutes  and  49  sec  later 
the  boats  started  their  engines  and  we 
had  to  terminate  our  final  recording 
of  Gigi.  During  the  3  min  and  55  sec 
of  quiet-ship  conditions  we  recorded 
1.304  clicks.  The  number  of  clicks 
per  burst  (or  train)  varied  from  I  to 
833  and  the  click  repetition  rate  from 

9.5  to  36.0/sec.  The  longest  click 
train,  containing  833  clicks  at  an 
average  repetition  rate  of  19/sec. 
began  about  1  min  after  the  boats  had 
shut  down  their  engines.  Although 
the  amplitude  of  the  signals  varied 
with  time,  we  could  not  correlate 
signal  level  with  the  location  of  Gigi 
because  the  animal  was  not  seen  dur- 
ing the  entire   time  of  the  recording. 

SOUNDS  RECORDED  FROM 
GRAY  WHALES  OFF 
VANCOUVER  ISLAND 

The  system  used  to  record  sounds 
in  the  presence  of  gray  whales  in 
Wickaninnish  Bay  on  the  west  coast 
of  Vancouver  Island,  Canada,  con- 
sisted of  a  cassette  recorder  (Sony 
Model  TC-126)  and  a  portable  under- 
water listening  set  (InterOcean  Model 
9()A  Bio-Acustik).  The  useable  fre- 
quency range  of  the  system  was  100 
Hz  to  10  kHz.  The  hydrophone  ar- 
rangement shown  in  Figure  3  resulted 
in  good  quality  recordings  with  the 
small  boat  system. 

Since  1967,  as  many  as  seven  gray 
whales  have  been  sighted  at  one  time 
in  Wickaninnish  Bay.  However,  all  of 
the  recordings  described  here  were 
from  single  whales  or  pairs.  At  1725 
hr  on  10  August  1973.  several  click 
trains  were  recorded  from  a  single 
feeding  gray  whale  in  10  m  of  water, 
1.200  m  friim  shore.  Ver\    little  wind 


42 


and  calm  seas  made  recording  condi- 
tions ideal.  The  first  clicks,  shown  in 
Figure  4F,  began  1  mm  after  the 
whale  started  a  3-min-J!5-sec-long  dive. 
at  a  distance  of  50  to  70  m  from  the 
hydrophone.  Additional  click  trains 
(Figure  4G)  occurred  simultaneously 
with  the  first  exhalation  after  the 
dive.  Twenty  sec  later,  noise  from  an 
unseen  boat  began  and  continued  for 
95  sec.  A  third  click  train  was  emit- 
ted 50  sec  after  the  boat  noises  ceased 
and  50  sec  prior  to  the  next  blow.  By 
then,  the  whale  was  80  to  100  m  from 
the  hydrophone  and  the  received  level 
of  the  clicks  was  5  to  7  dB  lower  than 
the  level  of  the  clicks  recorded  when 
the  whale  was  half  that  distance  from 
the  hydrophone. 

On  18  August  197.^.  the  click  train 
shown  in  Figure  4H  was  recorded 
from  a  single  feeding  gray  whale  at 
0900  hr.  The  whale  was  about  600  m 
from  shore  in  4  m  of  water.  The  sur- 
face was  calm  with  about  a  Im  swell. 
At  the  time  the  click  train  was  emitted, 
the  whale  v\as  100  to  150  m  from  the 
hydrophone.  Twenty  min  later  a  sin- 
gle harbor  porpoise,  Phocoena  pho- 
coena.  was  observed  in  the  area. 

About  5  hr  of  recordings  uere 
made  in  the  presence  of  the  gray 
whales  in  Wickaninnish  Bay  and 
much  additional  monitoring  was  done 
without  recording.  Although  at  times 
nearly  continuous  very  faint  clicking 
could  be  heard,  only  about  250  of  the 
recorded  clicks  had  good  signal-to- 
noise  ratios.  The  number  of  clicks  per 
train  varied  from  I  to  96  with  repeti- 
tion rates  of  8  to  40/sec.  The  principal 
energy  of  these  clicks  occupied  a  band 
from  about  2  to  6  kHz.  centered  at 
3.5  to  4.0  kHz.  The  average  click 
duration  was  a  little  under  2  msec. 

DISCUSSION 


striction  (similar  to  the  sound  of  air' 
escaping  from  a  scuba  regulator  un- 
derwater). Since  this  whale  sound 
generally  was  not  associated  with  ex- 
halation or  blowhole  movement,  if  it 
were,  in  fact,  generated  by  escaping 
air.  the  air  must  have  passed  from  one 
internal  chamber  to  another.  No  bub- 
bles v\ere  observed  coming  from  the 
mouth  or  blowholes. 

Although  the  possibility  exists  that 
another  species  of  marine  mammal 
could  have  produced  the  clicks  re- 
corded when  Gigi  was  released  off 
San  Diego  and  the  clicks  recorded  in 
the  presence  of  gray  whales  in  Wick- 
aninnish Bay.  we  think  the  evidence 
indicates  that  the  clicks  did  come  from 
the  gray  whales.  The  acoustic  param- 
eters of  the  clicks  recorded  from  the 
geographic  areas  are  nearly  identical. 
The  only  marine  mammals,  other 
than  gray  whales,  observed  in  either 
recording  area  was  the  single  Phocoena 
phocoeiw  observed  a  half  hour  after 
the  recording  was  made  on  18  August 
1973  in  Wickaninnish  Bay  and  a 
small  group  of  Dclphiniis  dclphis. 
about  2  km  awa\  from  the  site  of 
Gigi's  release  a  half  hour  before  she 
was     released.     Phocoena     phocoena. 


however,  has  not  been  observed  off 
San  Diego,  and  clicks  of  Delphinits 
have  a  much  higher  frequency  content 
than  described  in  this  report.  Also, 
the  level  of  the  clicks  recorded  in  the 
presence  of  Gigi  was  too  high  for  the 
sounds  to  have  come  from  the  Del- 
phinits as  the  clicks  appeared  to  origi- 
nate from  a  single  source  rather  than 
from  a  group  of  animals. 

We  have  no  evidence  that  the  clicks 
recorded  in  the  presence  of  gray 
whales  have  an  echolocation  function, 
but  if  the\  do.  their  frequency  range 
(2  to  6  kHz)  probably  would  be  too 
low  for  the  sounds  to  be  useful  for 
locating  small  individual  food  organ- 
isms. However,  they  could  be  helpful 
for  finding  dense  concentrations  of 
organisms  or  for  ranging  off  the  bot- 
tom to  feed  or  navigate.  Despite  four 
seasons  of  recording  in  the  presence 
of  hundreds  of  migrating  gray  whales 
off  San  Diego,  Naval  Undersea  Center 
personnel  have  never  recorded  similar 
clicks  from  the  whales.  But.  accord- 
ing to  most  authorities,  gray  whales 
do  not  feed  on  their  long  migrations 
(Rice  and  Wolman.  1971).  If  the 
clicks  were  associated  with  feeding, 
we  consequently  should  not  expect  to 


TAPE  RECORDER 
AMPLIFIER 


CORK  FLOATS,^ 


HYDROPHONE  LINE 
(60  FT  LONG) 


SPAR  BUOV  (BICYCLE 
NNER  TUBEI 


BRASS  SWIVEL 


8"  DAMPING  DISC - 


^CORK  FLOAT  FOR 
NEUTRAL  BUOYANCY 


We  do  not  know  how  any  of  the 
sounds  discussed  in  this  paper  were 
actually  produced  by  the  gray  whales. 
The  ""metallic-sounding  pulsed  signal" 
produced  by  Gigi  at  Sea  World  sound- 
ed like  air  bubbles  escaping  from  an 
area  of  high   pressure  through  a  con- 


Fjgure    3.  —  Hydrophone    suspension    system    used    to    record    underwater    sounds    in    Wickaninnish 
Bay,  Vancouver  Island,  Canada. 


43 


1  a>  -  x 

iii- 


O    O    w    « 


2  «  E  - 

CO  £  a 

0)  C  (A    k 

•*  -  .CD 

C  <Q  S  f 

—  O  O  * 

-r  P  T,  T3 


g-^  »  ■ 

^  o  I 

_  <«  T3 

2  •=  «  = 

Z    u   <>)   CO 

u)  c  u 

.  ■"  —  u. 
>,  a  ffl 

in  M  -a  j2 


Sen?  o 

c       .- 

=  5  ■E.SJ 

2  .?  a 
o  <  »  i' 

»  S^o 

■  "52 

X  a  a  o 
a  c  «  £ 

*   C    Of 

»  u  £  a 
-  SI  S° 
o  a  m  " 

*  o>  S;  o 

•SOS 


11"=  = 

_    „  O    (0 

.£  c  5!  i 

Of  '^ 

"Is  o 


»  o  c  5 

f-  "  - 

»  E  J3  a.    . 

O    *-  Dl 

=  o  E  «  E 

o  m  ■;  °  " 


na>< 


^1  = 

—  ■  2  ° 

.2   «  i  O  r; 

■=  =  in  Q)  * 

S  o  tj  a  " 

0  o  5  "•  c 

">    3  t  .  S 

■  o  u  a>  -c 

<  i3  >  -D  W 

1  «  tt>  o  ai 

^   n  c  7 

j<  O  *  *■ 

o>  «  .z:  S  ■ 

3  o  *  a  .E 

"*^  *-  (0  <0 

U.    O  Tl  U  ^ 


8P  laABl  3MiV13a 


zH*i  ADNanOadd 


13A31  3Alitf13a 


encounter  them  in  this  area  of  migrat- 
ing whales.  When  the  clicks  were 
recorded  in  Wickaninnish  Bay,  the 
gray  whales  were  feeding.  Why  Gigi 
emitted  clicks  when  released  is  un- 
known. In  this  case,  their  function 
could  have  been  orientation  since  it 
is  unlikely  that  she  was  looking  for 
food  so  soon  after  being  placed  in  a 
new  environment.  The  clicks  dis- 
cussed here  are  only  slightly  like 
those  recorded  by  Asa-Dorian  in  1955 
(see  Wenz.  1964).  They  are  not  similar 
to  any  other  reported  gray  whale 
sounds. 

Other  recent  evidence  for  mysticetes 
producing  click-type  sounds  has  been 
reported  by  Beamish  and  Mitchell 
(19711.  Their  recordings  in  the  pres- 
ence of  blue  whales  included  clicks 
with  peak  energy  in  a  band  from  2  1 
to  3  1  kHz. 

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS 

We  are  grateful  to  Wilburn  G. 
("Bud")  Donahoo  for  his  help  at  Sea 
World  during  the  recording  session; 
to  William  C.  Cummings  for  his 
advice  and  assistance  in  the  recordings 
of  Gigi  at  sea.  and  to  William  E. 
Evans  and  Fay  Wolfson  for  their 
suggestions  on  the  manuscript. 

This  work  was  supported  by  the 
Naval  Undersea  Center.  Independent 
Research  funding,  and  the  Office  of 
Naval  Research.  Oceanic  Biology 
Branch.  Grant  No.  NR  104-123. 

LITERATURE  CITED 


Asa-Donan,  P.  V.,  and  P.  J.  Perkins.  1967. 
Ttie  controversial  production  of  sound 
by  the  California  gray  whale,  Eschricluiiu 
gihhosus.  Nor.  Hvalfangst-Tid.  (Norwe- 
gian Whaling  Gazette)  56:74-77. 

Beamish,  P.,  and  E.  Mitchell.  1971.  Ultra- 
sonic sounds  recorded  in  the  presence  of 
a  blue  whale,  Bakwrniplera  tnit^cultis. 
Deep-Sea  Res.  18:803-809. 

Cummings,  W.  C,  P.  O.  Thompson,  and  R. 
Cook.  1968.  Underwater  sounds  of  mi- 
grating gray  whales,  Eschruhtius  kUiucus 
(Cope).     J.  Acoust.Soc.  Am.44:1278-1281. 

Eberhardt,  R.  L.,  and  W.  E.  Evans.  1962. 
Sound  activity  of  the  California  gray 
whale,  Eschrichnu.s  glaiiciis.  J.  Aud.  Eng. 
Soc.  10:324-328. 

Gales,  R.  S.  1966.  Pickup,  analysis,  and 
interpretation  of  underwater  acoustic  data. 
Ill  K.  S.  Norris  (editor).  Whales,  dolphins, 
and  porpoises,  p.  435-444.  Univ.  Calif. 
Press,  Berkeley  and  Los  Angeles. 


Hubbs,  C.  L.  1966.  Comments.  In  K.  S. 
Norris  (editor).  Whales,  dolphins,  and 
porpoises,  p.  444.  Univ.  Calif.  Press, 
Berkeley  and  I  os  Angeles, 

Painter,  D.  W.,  II.  1963.  Ambient  noise 
in  a  coastal  lagoon.  J.  Acoust.  Soc.  Am. 
35:I458-1459(L). 

Poulter,  T,  C.  1968.  Vocalization  of  the 
gray  whales  in  Laguna  Ojo  de  Liebre 
(Scammon's  Lagoon)  Baja  California, 
Mexico.  Nor  Hvalfangst-Tid.  (Norwegian 
Whaling  Gazette)  57:53-62. 


Rasmussen,  R.  A.,  and  N.  E.  Head.  1965. 
The  quiel  gray  whale  ( E.schnchinis  glaiicu.s). 
Deep-Sea  Res.  12:869-877. 

Rice.  I).  W.,  and  A.  A.  Wolman.  1971. 
The  life  history  and  ecology  of  the  gray 
whale  {Escliricluiiis  robuxius).  Spec. 
Publ.  3.  Am.  Soc.  Mammal.,  142  p. 

Wenz,  G.  M.  1964.  Curious  noises  and 
the  sonic  environment  in  (he  ocean.  In 
W.  N.  Tavolga  (editor).  Marine  bio- 
acoustics,  p.  101-123.  Pergamon  Press. 
New  York. 


MFR  Paper  1054.  From  Marine  Fisheries  Review,  Vol. 
36,  No.  4,  April  1974.  Copies  of  this  paper,  in  limited 
numbers,  are  available  from  D83.  Technical  Information 
Division,  Environmental  Science  Information  Center, 
NCAA,  Washington.  DC  20235. 


MFR  PAPER  1055 


Aerial  Observations  of  Migrating  Gray 
Whales,  Eschrichtius  robustus,  off 
Southern  California,  1969-72 


J.S.  LEATHERWOOD 

ABSTRACT 

Miiiratini;  iiray  hIuiIcs  were  observed  from  lielicopler  und  fi.\ed-\\ini;  (linnifl 
from  central  Ccdifoniici  .soiilh  lo  Cedros  mid  Giuididiipe  Islunds.  Baja  California. 
Me.xico.  Willi  ihe  primary  .\ii;/ilini.;  effort  off  southern  California.  Peak  nundiers 
were  observed  off  soiit/iern  California  in  January  for  tlie  southward  iniiiration 
and  in  Marcli  for  tite  iiortliward  inii;ratioii.  Individuals  were  observed  with  the 
same  relative  frequency  80-160  km  offslun-e  as  they  were  within  80  km  of 
shore.  Cows  witli  calves  were  seen  from  February  through  May.  primarily 
inshore,  and  tended  lo  be  alone  or  with  other  cou  s  with  calves.  Yearling  whales 
were  seen  insliore  from  February  through  April  and  also  tended  to  be  solitcuy 
or  with  other  yearlings.  Average  speed  of  movement  for  lunthward  migrants 
was  2.8  knilhonr. 

Results  of  aerial  surveys  compare  favorably  with  published  summaries  of 
the  liming  of  migration  based  on  sliore  and  ship  samples  and  support  the  \'alue 
oj  aerial  surveys  us  u  tool  in  cetacean  population  studies. 


INTRODUCTION 

Since  shortly  after  its  population 
began  to  recover  from  a  second  near- 
e.xtermination  by  man  in  the  1920's 
and  I930's  (Gilmore,  1955),  the  Cali- 
fornia gray  whale,  Esclirichtius  ro- 
bustus, has  been  the  subject  of  more 
public  interest  and  more  scientific 
research  than  perhaps  any  other  spe- 
cies of  large  whale.   Because  of  their 


spectacular  nature  and  proximity  to 
shore  along  much  of  the  route,  the 
migrations  of  the  species  have  been 
rather  exhaustively  described  by  Scam- 
mon  (1874),  Hubbs  (1959),  Gilmore 
(1960a  and  1960b),  Rice  (1961),  Pike 
(19621.  Hubbs  and  Hubbs  (1967). 
Adams  ( 1968).  and  Rice  and  Wolman 
(1971).  Observations  from  shore  sta- 
tions   (primarily    at     Point    Loma    in 


45 


San  Diego,  and  at  Yankee  Point  near 
Monterey)  supplemented  with  aerial 
observations  and  boat  surveys,  have 
fixed  the  timing  and  described  most 
aspects  of  that  migration  in  detail. 

Even  so.  several  interesting  gaps 
still  exist  in  our  knowledge  of  the  mi- 
grating animals.  For  instance,  although 
Gilmore  (1969)  has  discussed  move- 
ment patterns  of  yearling  whales  on 
the  southern  migration,  there  are  no 
reports  on  the  movements  of  yearlings 
during  the  northern  migration.  Simi- 
larly, although  Hubhs  (1959)  reported 
that  "cows  with  calves  seem  to  take  a 
more   offshore   path."   actual    data   on 


- 

_ 

- 

I97Zn 

- 

1971^ 
19700 

- 

^ 

19S9n 

- 

' 

- 

GRAND  TOTALS 

- 

- 

74  FLIGHTS 
279.70  HOURS 

_J 

— j 

U  1  1— r-r 

^ 

p-r^ 

!^^^x^4' 

JAN      FEB      MM    APR      MAY     JUN      JUL      AUG      SEP      OCT     NOV     DEC 


Figure  1. —  Flight  hours,  1969-72. 


the  movements  of  mothers  with  calves 
after  they  leave  the  breeding  lagoons 
are  so  scant  that  Rice  and  Wolman 
(1971)  simpl>'  report  that  '"the  route 
taken  by  females  and  calves  during 
the  spring  migration  is  unknown." 
Finally,  although  average  rates  of 
movement  for  the  population  have 
been  computed  from  dates  of  peak 
passage  at  two  separate  shore  stations, 
there  are  actual  numbers  for  rates  of 
movement  of  individual  animals  to 
test  those  averages  only  for  the  south- 
ward migration  (W\rick.  1954;  Cum- 
mings,  Thompson,  and  Cook.  1968). 
Since  February  of  1969.  the  author 
has  been  conducting  routine  aerial 
surveys  of  the  cetaceans  off  southern 
California,  primarily  in  the  area  from 
lat.34°N  south  to  Islas  Todos  Santos 
and  offshore  as  far  as  280  km. 
Additional    flights    have   surveyed    the 


coast  from  Point  Mugu  north  to  Mon- 
terey Bay  in  March  and  the  area 
from  San  Diego  to  Cedros  and  Guada- 
lupe Islands  in  January  and  February. 


Ill    3^41(UP3  3  1    3^^,„„„ 

^-J   2    1    1   2  5lM  4  1  2   1^^ 

T|?1l    1    1    1  4  911  5  4  2    I'l'jJCEAN 

1J2|1   IJ  2^^5  4  5  5  62"  '™^ 

Wlfri    1   !i8  5  4    7  9  9   8 

ijzil'l    1  2  2  3  412  62431*^ 

142   15  3  2  12  3  I02J3221 


1  2 


23322533366  y 
3!2  2  2    1    1    14  2^ 

1       2   1111    1*1-|32' 


Figure  2. — Survey  effort  by  10-minute  blocks, 
southern  migration,  1  October  to  15  February. 
Each  number  represents  total  number  of  times 
that  area  was  surveyed  during  this  time  period. 


METHODS 

Flights  were  made  in  Navy  H-3 
helicopters  and  S-2  reconnaissance 
aircraft,  and  in  twin-engine  rental  air- 
craft. Survey  altitudes  ranged  from 
150  to  300  meters  depending  on 
weather  conditions.  Detailed  observa- 
tions were  made  from  as  low  as  15 
meters.  Although  gray  whales  were 
not  the  exclusive  target  of  the  survey, 
for  every  gra\  whale  sighting  the 
number  and  estimated  size  of  indi\id- 
uals.  their  location,  swimming  direc- 
tion and  speed,  and  details  of  behav- 
ior were  recorded. 

Through  I  July  1972  we  made  74 
flights  totaling  279.7  hours  of  obser- 
vation time  (Figure  1).  Sampling  ef- 
fort was  accelerated  during  March. 
April.  May.  and  June  1972  in  support 
of  the  radio  track  of  the  gray  whale 
Gigi  (Evans.  1972.  and  this  publica- 
tion) and  of  a  common  dolphin.  Dcl- 
pliiiui\  ilclphis.  subsequently  tagged 
and  radio-tracked  from  aircraft  (Evans 
and  l.eatherwood.  1972).  In  general, 
surveys  were  more  extensive  during 
the  period  of  the  northern  migration 
(approximaieh  mid-February  through 
Mav). 


J.  S.  Leafherwood  is  a  member 
of  the  staff  of  the  Bio-Systems 
Program.  Naval  Undersea  Cen- 
ter, San  Diego,  CA  92132. 

To  facilitate  data  analysis,  the 
study  area  was  divided  into  10-minute 
blocks,  and  tallies  were  maintained 
of  the  number  of  times  each  zone  was 
surveyed  for  cetaceans  whether  or  not 
animals  were  sighted.  Zones  were  not 
recorded  as  surveyed  if  cloud  cover, 
fog.  or  surface  water  conditions  pre- 
vented adequate  observation  in  the 
area. 


I 

V 

1 

1  1;  T^ 

r 

s 

^ 

^ 

1 

>rT\                 ^ 

1 

112  2  iVa 

1 

2  2  2  2  4^    " 

X 

1 

1 

1 

2 

6  5  8  11J4  9  5  e"^ 

4  r,.».   =T 

1  2 

1 

1 

1 

1 

14   4    3  131SiB9  10  7   7^7. 

i    |l 

r       1        3    5  8  10171210  8    7 

OCEAN 

r2 

I'l   1 

1       2   1    5  f,\3  4   9  25131414  3,        -| 

1 

l'    :i'2     'l  1^4 

8101631lt,„ 

1 

4 

4 

5 

5 

6  5!8  4  8  14153139 

s« 

1 

1 

1 

3 

3 

3 

3^2(4  3  5  5  1015232^ 

1 

1 

2 

2 

2 

3 

5 

V 

2 

2 

1 

2 

4 

4  3 

3 

3 

2  1 

2 

3 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

- 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

liiii 

1 

1 

» 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

\ 

1 

12C 

" 

119" 

HE 

• 

117 

Figure  3, —  Survey  effort  by  10-mtnute  blocks, 
northern  migration,  16  February  to  1  June,  Each 
number  represents  total  number  of  times  that 
area  was  surveyed  during  this  period. 


Figures  2  and  3  summarize  the  to- 
tal number  of  times  each  zone  was 
surveved  during  the  periods  of  the 
southern  migration  (  I  October  to  15 
February)  and  northern  migration  (16 
Februar>  to  I  June)  of  gray  whales. 
Effort  was  concentrated  off  San  Di- 
ego during  both  periods  because  all 
three  airfields  used  are  located  there. 
The  substantial  increase  of  effort  in 
the  southern  San  Pedro  Channel  from 
the  southern  to  the  northern  migra- 
tion is  the  result  oi  the  aerial  radio- 
tracking  mentioned  above. 

During  the  three  migratory  seasons, 
gray  whale  groups  were  sighted  91 
times  in  the  stud>  area.  Of  these.  23 
groups  included  mothers  with  calves, 
19  included  yearling  whales,  and  8 
sightings  represented  observations  of 
the  same  animals  on  successive  davs. 


46 


RESULTS 


Migration  Peaks  and 
Offshore  IVIovements 


The  picture  of  migration  peaks  ob- 
tained from  the  aerial  surveys  agrees 
with  the  summaries  of  Hubbs  (1459) 
and  Gilmore  (1960).  The  earliest 
animals  were  seen  in  the  third  week 
of  December  and  the  latest  during 
late  May.  The  largest  numbers  of 
animals  were  seen  during  the  first  and 
second  weeks  of  January  and  the  sec- 
ond and  fourth  weeks  of  March.  Be- 
cause the  amount  of  aerial  survey 
effort  varied  from  month  to  month, 
indices  of  apparent  abundance  were 
computed  for  data  in  blocks  of  a 
month  by  dividing  both  the  number 
of  aerial  observations  and  the  number 
of  individuals  seen  by  the  amount  of 
survey  effort  during  that  time  period. 
These  indices  (Figure  4)  also  clearly 
indicate  the  periods  of  greatest  abun- 
dance off  San  Diego  as  January  and 
March. 

During  both  legs  of  the  migration 
many  whales  were  sighted  far  offshore. 
(Figure  5)  presumably  taking  what 
has  been  called  the  "inter-island  leg" 
(Gilmore.  1969).  For  instance,  with- 
in the  64  km  wide  band  between  lat. 
32°I5'N  and  32°55'N.  southern  mi- 
grating gray  whales  were  encountered 
during  4.7  percent  of  the  flights  in 
the  first  80  km  from  shore.  5.0  percent 
of  the  flights  in  the  second  80  km. 
and  1  percent  of  the  flights  over  the 
next  48  km.  Similarly  on  the  northern 
migration,  grays  were  sighted  6.4. 
9.2,  and  3.3  percent  respectively  of 
the  times  the  three  zones  were  sur- 
veyed. These  findings  support  the  con- 
tentions of  Rice  (1965)  and  Rice  and 
Wolman  (197  1)  that  at  least  since 
1965  a  rather  high  percentage  of  the 
whales  have  passed  offshore,  out  of 
sight  of  Point  Loma. 

Though  most  of  the  animals  taking 
the  offshore  route  apparently  strike 
for  the  coast  shortly  after  they  pass 
bv   the   southernmost   of  the  Channel 


5.0- 


4.0 


3.0 


2.0 


1.0 


5.38 


2.36 


TOTAL  DBS. 
1"  TOTAL  FLT.  HRS. 


2.20 


1.50 


.38 


.02 


14.0 

- 

TOTAL  ANS. 
2 "TOTAL  FLT.  HRS. 

12.6 

12.0 

- 

10.0 

- 

8.0 

- 

6.1 

6.0 

— 

4.91 

4.0 

" 

2.4 

2.0 

" 

.9 

1.04 

OCT  NOV  DEC  JAN  FEB  MAR  APR  IMAY  JUN  OCT  NOV  DEC  JAN  FEB  MAR  APR  MAY  JUN 

Figure  4. — Indices  of  apparent  abundance  (Ij)  ol  gray  whales  (rom  aerial  surveys.  1969-72. 


34° 


33  Figure  5. — Aerial  survey 
gray  whale  sightings, 
1969-72. 


32° 


1?0° 


119° 


118° 


117° 


Islands,  some  do  pass  offshore  toward 
Guadalupe  Island.  Gilmore  (1955)  re- 
ported Hubbs'  sighting  of  three 
mothers  with  calves  outside  Guadalupe 
in  February  of  1950.  In  February 
1972.  I  located  two  gray  whales  on 
the  outside  of  Guadalupe  near  the 
southwest  tip.  A  third  animal,  too 
close  to  the  cliffs  to  permit  close  ex- 
amination, was  also  believed  to  be  a 
gray.  The  two  verified  sightings  were 
both  adult  animals  1  1  or  more  meters 
in  length. 


Cow-Calf  Groups 

As  was  noted  earlier,  the  routes 
taken  by  females  with  calves  during 
the  spring  migration  have  been  un- 
known. 

Twenty-three  northward  migrating 
groups  containing  mothers  with  calves 
were  observed  during  the  aerial  sur- 
veys (Figure  6).  The  earliest  was 
sighted  18  February,  the  latest  on  18 
May.  Although  the  majority  of  those 
sightings  were  well  inshore,  this  may 


47 


be  a  result  of  the  heavy  sighting  effort 
inshore  in  1972  during  the  times  of 
the  northern  migration.  The  few  sight- 
ings of  mothers  with  calves  late  in 
the  season,  however,  were  more  off- 
shore. 

Of  the  23  times  mothers  with  calves 
have  been  observed,  in  18  mothers 
and  calves  have  been  either  by  them- 
selves or  with  other  mothers  with 
calves.  In  only  four  instances  were 
they  in  the  company  of  other  adults. 
This  observation  may  be  supported 
in  part  by  the  fact  that  females  with 
calves  are  not  receptive  to  breeding 
because  a  female  calves  and  breeds  in 
alternate  years  (Scammon.  1874;  Gil- 
more.   1961;  Rice  and  Wolman.  1971). 

Yearlings 

There  is  still  little  information  in 
the  literature  on  the  distribution  and 
movements  of  yearling  gray  whales. 
Hubbs  (1972  pers.  comm.)  has  ob- 
served solitary  yearlings  migrating 
south  very  near  shore  off  La  Jolla. 
Gilmore  (1960b)  reported  that  year- 
lings frequently  travel  with  larger 
adult  animals  on  the  southern  migra- 
tion, presumably  learning  the  migra- 
tion route,  but  that  solitary  individuals 
are  also  seen. 

Based  on  the  growth  curve  of  gray 
whales  (Rice  and  Wolman.  1971)  and 
on  estimates  of  size  range  at  time  of 
weaning  (Gilmore,  1961).  all  whales 
estimated  in  our  surveys  to  be  be- 
tween about  6  and  9  meters  (20-30 
feet)  long  were  classified  as  yearling 
whales.  The  opportunity  to  observe 
Gigi  (8.26  m  |27  ft]  long)  from  the 
air  for  nearly  an  hour  in  early  March 
1972  verilied  the  accuracy  of  my 
previous  size  estimates  and  increased 
confidence  in  the  reliability  of  the 
classification   in   subsequent   sightings. 

The  room  for  error  in  this  estimate 
notwithstanding,  yearling-sized  whales 
were  observed  with  higher  frequency 
than  expected  (Figure  7).  A  total  of 
21  yearlings  or  groups  of  yearlings 
was  observed  in  the  study  area.  Of 
those.  16  were  observed  after  the  re- 
lease of  Gigi  (Evans.    1972)  all  during 


Figure  6.  —  Locations  of 
sightings  of  mottier-calf 
groups  during  aerial  sur- 
veys. 1969-72. 


Figure  7.  —  Locations  o( 
sightings  ot  probable  year- 
ling gray  whales  (estimat- 
ed size.  20  to  30  feet)  dur- 
ing aerial  surveys,  1969-72. 


^Z"""'"'^''^i^9> 

liiiiiiiiiii 

'^..rrr^ 

"m^           1 

*--%..---— >^;;|lliil 

s                        ;■;■;: 

•  NOV       '^ 

\     ANGEL 

•  DEC 

»~"\ 

:■:;: 

'  JAN 

■\^ 

'  FEB 
•  MAR 

• 

^ 

•  APR 

'^ 

\    OCEAN- 

»  MAY 

<=^ 

*  vicis; 

Iv 

*\'"m 

V 

-   NO  SIGHTS  OF  YEARLINGS  SOUTH  THIS  CHART 

**^i 

-  NO  SIGHTINGS  OF  YEARLINGS  OFFSHORE 

♦  1 

-  27  AND  28  APRIL  1972   X  8  YEARLINGS  FROM 

A 

PT    CONCEPTION  NORTH  TO  MONTERREY  BAY 

♦         r 

34° 


33° 


32° 


120° 

the  period  of  the  northward  migration. 
No  yearlings  were  seen  south  of  the 
Coronado  Islands,  but  a  total  of  16 
was  encountered  on  a  2-day  surve\ 
flight  north  to  Monterey  Bay  in  April. 
All  were  within  5  km  of  the  beach. 
No  yearlings  were  observed  in  the 
offshore  areas  where  other  whales 
were  seen.  Further,  like  cows  and 
calves,  yearlings  tended  to  be  either 
by  themselves  or  with  other  yearlings. 
In  only  4  of  the  2  I  cases  were  year- 
lings accompanying  adult  animals. 
This  absence  of  yearlings  with  adults 
may  be  a  result  of  the  forced  rejection 


119° 


118° 


117° 


h\     the    mother    at    the    lute    summer 
weaning  in  the  north. 

Rates  of  Movement 

Estimates  of  rates  of  movement  for 
southward  migrating  whales  have 
ranged  from  7.7  km/hour  calculated 
over  the  entire  migration  route  (Pike. 
1962)  to  10.2  km/hour  calculated 
over  a  small  segment  of  the  route 
(Cummings  et  al..  1968).  Rice  and 
Wolman  (1971)  used  ihe  times  of  peak 
passage  at  two  separate  shore  stations 
to  calculate  the  average  distance  trav- 


48 


eled  In  24  hours  as  185  kni.  Pike 
(1962)  used  the  same  calculations  to 
determine  that  northward  migrants 
traveled  from  56-80  km/day  at  about 
Vi-'/i    the  rate  of  southern  migrants. 

During  this  study,  natural  markings 
on  three  whales  observed  on  successive 
days  permitted  the  calculation  of 
speeds  of  movement  along  two  areas 
of  the  coastline.  Rates  of  movement 
of  all  3  are  comparable  to  Pike's 
calculations. 

Two  12-1.^  meter  individuals,  one 
distinctly  marked  with  white  brush 
markings  on  the  tail  stock  and  flukes, 
were  seen  11.  12.  and  13  April  1972. 
During  the  49.5  hours  between  the 
first  and  third  sightings,  they  moved 
approximately  129  km  from  the 
Coronado  Islands  to  near  .San  Cle- 
mente.  Calif.,  an  average  speed  of 
only  2.6  km/hour. 

A  12-meter  individual  with  a  nearly 
all  white  tail  fluke  and  a  wide  white 
band  across  the  tail  stock  was  seen 
with  four  other  animals  off  Point 
La  Jolla  on  27  March  1972.  The 
same  animal  was  observed  again  on 
the  28th  just  northwest  of  Newport 
Beach  and  on  the  29th  13  km  south- 
west of  Point  Vincente.  Net  movement 
in  44  hours  was  128  km  or  2.9  km/ 
hour. 

Finally,  an  unusually  dark  yearling 
observed  just  south  of  Point  .San  Luis 
27  April  1972  had  moved  64  km  to 
the  north  when  it  was  resighted  23 
hours  later  northwest  of  Point  Estero. 
It  had  moved  at  an  average  rate  of 
2.8  km/hour. 


SUMMARY 

Results  of  periodic  aerial  surveys 
are  comparable  to  those  from  ship 
and  land-based  surveys  in  defining 
the  timing  of  migration  of  gray  whale 
populations  past  southern  California. 
Peak  densities  were  observed  in  Janu- 
ary for  the  southward  and  in  March 
for  the  northward  migration.  Over 
half  the  population  observed  passed 
more  than  64  km  offshore  from  San 
Diego.  Cows  with  calves  were  seen 
from  February  through  May  primar- 
ily inshore  and  tended  to  be  alone  or 
with  other  cows  with  calves.  Yearling 
whales  were  seen  inshore  from  Feb- 
ruary through  April  and  tended  to  be 
solitary  or  with  other  yearlings.  Fi- 
nally, average  speeds  observed  for 
three  individuals  over  small  segments 
of  the  northward  migration  route 
were  comparable  to  estimates  based 
on  peak  movements  past  shore  stations. 

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS 

I  am  indebted  to  many  people  for 
help  with  this  project.  John  Hall  and 
Larry  Tsunoda  each  flew  some  of  the 
survey  flights.  George  Lingle  and 
John  Moore  helped  summarize  the 
data.  Raymond  Gilmore.  Dale  W. 
Rice,  and  William  F.  Perrin  read  the 
manuscript  and  made  useful  sugges- 
tions. Marita  Doerflein.  Marty  Allen, 
and  Shirlee  Preis  typed  the  manu- 
script. 

Finally.  I  am  indebted  to  the  officers 
and  men  of  Carrier  Antisubmarine 
Air  Groups  53  and  59  for  their  skill, 
patience  and  helpful  spirit,  and  to 
LCDR  Al  Zollers  for  scheduling  air- 
craft. 


This  research  was  part  of  NUC  IR 
Project  150550  "Marine  Mammal 
Populations,"  W.  E.  Evans  principal 
investigator. 

LITERATURE  CITED 


Adams,  L.  1968.  Census  ol  the  gray  whale, 
1466-67.  Nor.Hvalfangsl-Tid.  57:41-43. 

Cumniings,  W.  C,  P.  O.  Thompson,  and  R. 
Cook.  1968.  Underwater  sounds  of  mi- 
grating gray  whales,  EsiluiLiuiiis  i;Uiiicus 
(Cope).  J.  Acoust.  Soc.  Am.  44:  1278-1281. 

Evans.  W.  E.  1972.  A  mobile  maruie  en- 
vironmental survey  vehicle.  NUC  TN  No. 
758. 

Evans,  W.  E.,  and  J.  S.  Lealherwood.  1972. 
The  use  of  an  inslrumenled  marine  mam- 
mal as  an  oceanographic  survey  platform. 
NUC  TP  No.  311,  11  p. 

Gilmore.  R.  M.  19??.  The  return  ot  the 
gray  whale.  Sci.  Am.  192(l):62-74. 

.  1960a.  A  census  of  the  Cali- 
fornia gray  whale.  U.S.  Fish  Wildl.  Serv., 
Spec.  Sci.  Rep.  Fish.  342.  30  p. 

1960b.     Census     and     migration 


of  the  California  gray  whale.  (In  Engl, 
and  Norw.]  Nor.  Hvalfangst-Tid.  49: 
409-43 1 . 

1961.     The     story     of    the     gray 


whale.   2nd    ed.    Privately    published,   San 
Diego,  16  p. 

1969.     The  gray  whale.    Oceans 


1:9-20. 

Gilmore,  R.  M.,  and  G.  Ewing.  1954. 
Calving  of  the  California  grays.  Pac.  Dis- 
covery 7(3):  13-15. 

Hubhs,  C.  L.  1959.  Natural  history  of  the 
grav  whale.  Proc.  XVth  Int.  Congr.  Zoo!., 
Sect.  III.  Pap.  46,  3  p. 

Hubbs,  C,  L..  and  L.  C.  Hubbs.  1967. 
Gray  whale  censuses  bv  airplane  in  Mexi- 
co. Calif.  Fish  Game  53:23-27. 

Pike.  G.  C.  1962.  Migration  and  feeding 
of  the  grav  whale  iE.Mhncluins  >;ibbosiis). 
J.  Fish  Res.  Board  Can.  19:815-838. 

Rice.  D.  W.  1961.  Census  of  the  Califor- 
nia grav  whale.  1959-60.  (In  Engl,  and 
Norw.]    Nor.   Hvalfangsl-Tid.    50:219-225. 

.      1965.     Offshore    southward    mi- 

gralion  of  gray  whales  off  southern  Cali- 
fornia. J.  Mammal.  46:504-505. 

Rice.  D.  W..  and  A.  A.  Wolman.  1971. 
The  life  history  and  ecology  of  the  gray 
whale  {Eschruhliiis  nihiisiiis).  Am.  Soc. 
Mammal.  Spec.  Publ.  No.  3.  142  p. 

Scammon.  C.  M.  1874.  The  marine  mam- 
mals of  (he  north-western  coast  of  North 
America.  John  H.  Carmany  and  Co..  San 
Francisco.  3  19  p. 

Wyrick,  R.  F.  1954.  Observations  on  the 
movements  of  the  Pacihc  gray  whale. 
Eschnchinis  i^taicciis  (Cope).  J.  Mammal. 
35:596-598. 


MFR  Paper  1055.  From  Marine  Fisheries  Review,  Vol. 
36,  No.  4,  April  1974.  Copies  of  this  paper,  in  limited 
numbers,  are  available  from  D83.  Technical  Information 
Division,  Environmental  Science  Information  Center, 
NCAA.  Washington,  DC  20235. 


49 


MFR  PAPER  1056 


A  Note  on  Gray  Whale  Behavioral 
Interactions  with  Other  Marine  Mammals 


J.  S.  LEATHERWOOD 


With  the  exception  of  reports  of 
killer  whales,  Orciniis  urea,  attacking 
gray  whales.  Esihricltuus  nihti.siii\. 
(Scammon,  1874;  Andrews.  1914; 
Gilmore.  1961;  Burrage.  1964;  More- 
John,  1968;  and  Baldridge.  1972)  there 
are  no  accounts  in  the  literature  on 
the  behavioral  interactions  between 
gray  whales  and  other  marine  mam- 
mals. During  aerial  surveys  of  south- 
ern California  cetaceans,  (Leather- 
wood.  1974).  I  often  observed  gray 
whales  in  close  association  with  other 
marine  mammals  (Figure  I).  Though 
the  abundance  of  all  these  species  in 
the  area  during  the  winter  and  spring 
makes  coincidental  association  likely. 
the  following  incidents  represent  be- 
havioral interaction; 

Four  days  after  her  release,  when 
she  was  first  relocated  by  aircraft,  the 
gray  whale  Gigi  (Evans.  1974)  was 
swimming  with  a  small  group  of  Pa- 
cific bottlenose  dolphins  Tiirsiops  sp. 
in  the  surf  zone  just  north  of  the  San 
Clemente.  Calif,  pier.  Though  the 
dolphins  left  the  whale  shortly  after 
the  aircraft  began  to  circle  the  area. 
when  first  seen  they  were  closely 
clustered  about  the  head  of  the  gray 
whale  as  if  riding  its  pressure  wave. 
Since  Gigi  was  housed  during  almost 
her  entire  internment  at  .Sea  World 
with  an  Atlantic  bottlenose  dolphin. 
iursiops  iniiu  alii.s.  this  association 
in  the  wild  may  have  been  a  result  of 
the  captivity.  However.  I  have  ob- 
served gray  whales  swimming  with 
bottlenose  dolphins  in  the  wild  in  six 
other  instances,  in  three  of  which  the 
porpoises  were  also  riding  the  whales' 
pressure  waves.  Further,  bottlenose 
dolphins  arc  common  along  the  Baja 
California  portion  of  the  gray  whales" 


migration  route  and  in  the  breeding 
lagoons  and  have  been  reported  mov- 
ing freely  among  California  gray 
whales  (Evans  and  Dreher,  1962). 

On  19  January  1972.  three  adult 
gray  whales  were  observed  heading 
southwest  over  Sixty-Mile  Bank  (lat. 
32°()5'N.  long.  1  18°  lO'W).  The  entire 
area  was  rich  with  birds  and  the  sur- 
face action  of  many  schools  of  small 
fishes  and  a  large  aggregation  of  odon- 
tocetes  (including  over  1.000  northern 
right-whale  dolphins.  Liwoclclphis 
htircalis.  approximately  500  Pacific 
common  dolphins.  Dclphiiiiis  dclphis. 
approximately  500  North  Pacilic 
white-sided  dolphins.  Liiiicnoihynclius 
ohUqKuicns.  and  at  least  3  Dall  por- 
poises. Phocoenoidex  dcilli)  was  pres- 
ent. The  whales  were  observed  at 
close  range  from  a  helicopter  for  nearly 
45  minutes  and  dolphins  and  porpoises 
were  observed  riding  the  pressure 
waves    of    the    whales    for    the    entire 


J.  S.  Leatherwood  is  with  the 
Naval  Undersea  Center  Bio- 
Svstems  Program,  San  Uiego, 
CA  92132. 

time.  All  species  were  involved  in  the 
interaction. 

In  addition,  during  this  same  period 
gray  whales  were  observed  riding  the 
large  glassy  swells  which  moved 
through  the  area.  This  behavior  is 
common  among  small  dolphins  (e.g.. 
1  iirsidps.  Di'lphiiuis.  La^enorhyiuhiis, 
Lissodctphis)  and  is  perhaps  not  sur- 
prising for  the  gray  whale  in  the 
light  of  its  reported  surf-riding  (Cald- 
well and  Caldwell.  1963), 

In  March  1971.  several  gray  whales 
were  observed  along  the  west  side  of 
Catalina  Island  where  an  estimated 
200  pilot  whales.  Glchiccpliald  sp., 
were  distributed  in  small  groups  from 
Ben  Wesson  Point  to  the  northwest 
tip  of  the  island.  One  gray  whale  was 
turned  belly  up  in  the  midst  of  a  pod 
of  12  or  15  pilot  whales,  and  an  adult 
pilot  whale  was  swimming  over  the 
belly  of  the  inverted  gray  whale.  Both 
were  alarmed  by  the  aircraft  and 
sounded  on  our  approach. 

In  the  other  instances  (Figure  1) 
the  animals  were  simply  swimming 
close  to  each  other.  With  one  excep- 
tion, that  of  Gigi.  all  the  observed 
associations  between  gray  whales  and 
other  cetaceans  involved  adult  whales. 


Figure  1. — Locations  ol 
sightings  of  gray  whales 
associated  with  other  ma- 
rine mammals  (1969-1972). 


IURSIOPS  SP 
DEIPHINUSDELPHIS 
GLOBICEPHALASP 
PHOCOENOIOES  DALLI 
LAGENORHYNCHUS  OBLIQUIOENS 
LISSODEIPHISBOREALIS 


-  Z  =  ZALOPHUS  CALIFORNIANUS 


120 


iir 


118° 


117 


50 


all  greater  than  30  feet  in  length. 
Furthermore,  in  all  cases  the  gray 
whales  have  appeared  to  be  passive 
participants  in  the  interaction. 

LITERATURE  CITED 

Andrews.  R.  C  1914.  Monographs  of  the 
Pacific  Cclacea.  I.  The  California  gray 
whale  {Rhiichuinecifs  gUiiicus  Cope).  lis 
history,  habits,  external  anatomy,  osteology 
and  relationship.  Mem.  Am.  Mus.  Nat. 
Hist.  (New  Ser.)  1:227-287. 

Baldridge,  A.  1972.  Killer  whales  attack 
and  eat  a  gray  whale.  J.  Mammal.  53:898- 
900. 

Burrage,  B.  R.  1964.  An  observation  re- 
garding gray  whales  and  killer  whales. 
Trans.  Kansas  Acad.  Sci.  67:5.'^0-5?  1. 

Caldwell,  D.  K.,  and  M.  C.  Caldwell.  196.3. 
Surf-riding  by  the  California  gray  whale. 
Bull.  South.  Calif.  Acad.  Sci.  62(2):99. 


Evans,  W.  E.  1974.  Telemetering  of  tem- 
perature and  depth  data  from  a  free  rang- 
ing yearling  California  gray  whale,  £.«7i- 
richtnis  rohiisiiis.  Mar,  Fish.  Rev.  36(4): 
52-58. 

Evans.  W.  E.,  and  J.  J.  Dreher.  1962.  Ob- 
servations on  scouting  behavior  and  the 
associated  sound  production  by  the  Pacific 
bottlenosed  porpoise  (Tiir.siopi  i;illi  Dall). 
Bull.  South.  Calif.  Acad.  Sci.  61:217-226. 

Gilniore,  R,  M.  1961.  The  story  of  the  gray 
whale,  2nd  ed.  Privately  published,  San 
Diego,  16  p. 

Leatherwood,  J.  S.  1974.  Aerial  observa- 
tions of  migrating  gray  whales,  Eschrich- 
liiis  robustus,  off  southern  California  ( 1969- 
1972).      Mar.  Fish.  Rev.  36(4):45-49. 

Morejohn,  G.  V.  1968.  A  killer  whale- 
gray  whale  encounter.  J.  Mammal.  49: 
327-328. 

Scammon,  C.  M.  1874.  The  marine  mam- 
mals of  the  North-western  coast  of  North 
America.  John  H.  Carmany  and  Co., 
San  Francisco,  3  19  p. 


MFR  Paper  1056.  From  Marine  Fisheries  Review,  Vol. 
36.  No.  4,  April  1974.  Copies  of  this  paper,  in  limited 
numbers,  are  available  from  D83.  Tecfinical  Information 
Division.  Environmental  Science  Information  Center, 
NOAA.  Wasfiington.  DC  20235. 


MFR  PAPER  1057 


Aerial  Observations  of  Gray 
Whales  During  1973 


Radio  communications  with  shore 
observers  permitted  coordination  of 
observational  efforts.  Time,  location, 
numbers  of  whales,  and  behavior  ob- 
servations were  noted  for  the  sight- 
ings and  photographs  were  attempted 
on  occasion. 


122*  OO'W 

I 


MONTEREY    OAV                                   1 

N 

/ 

/        ^^MONTEREY 

^: " 

CYPRESS   -r 

YANKEE    PT,.f 

AOBSERVATION 

-A      SITE 
LOBOS    ROCKS    l 

% 

PT    SUR      -^ 

•^... 

obsefved  from   ptore                        V 

S§  A„. 

oDierved  from    shore 

SCALE    1  250.000 

Figure   1.  —  The   area   off  California   observed  for 
gray  whales.  15-23  January  1973. 


PAUL  N.  SUND  antd  JOHN  L.  O'CONNOR 


During  their  annual  southward 
migration  California  gray  whales. 
Eschrichliiis  rohiisnis.  were  observed 
between  Monterey  Bay  and  Point 
Sur.  Calif.  (Figure  1)  from  an  air- 
craft during  the  period  15-23  January 
1973.  An  aerial  survey  was  initiated 
in  response  to  recommendations  of 
the  Joint  Naval  Undersea  Center — 
National  Marine  Fisheries  Service 
(NMFS).  Southwest  Fisheries  Center 
Gray  Whale  Workshop  (held  in  La 
Jolla.  California  in  August  1972).  that 
the  accuracy  of  the  annual  NMFS 
shore  census  taken  near  Yankee  Point 
be  checked.  The  survey  was  designed 
to  compare  shore  observers'  estimates 
of  numbers  with  those  of  aerial  ob- 
servers; to  test  the  estimate  that  95 
percent  of  the  gray  whales  migrating 


by  Yankee  Point  pass  within  1.9  km 
(1.2  miles)  of  the  shore  (Rice  and 
Wolinan.  1971);  and  to  provide  ob- 
servations of  gray  whale  behavior  and 
associations  with  other  marine  mam- 
mal species.  The  utility  of  aerial  sur- 
veys in  cetacean  research  has  been 
demonstrated  by  Levenson  (1968)  and 
Leatherwood  ( 1974a. b).  This  paper 
reports  on  simultaneous  shore  and 
aircraft  observations  and  discusses 
the  problems  inherent  in  each  method. 

METHODS 

Five  flights,  totaling  13.6  hours, 
were  made  between  Monterey  Bay 
and  Point  Sur.  Calif.  (Figure  I)  in  a 
Cessna  172  flown  by  a  professional 
spotter-pilot  at  altitudes  ranging  from 
150   m   (500  ft)   to  900  m   (3,000  ft). 


RESULTS  AND  CONCLUSIONS 

From  the  aerial  observations  made 
in  the  sector  scanned  by  shore  obser- 
vers, the  following  points  were  deter- 
mined: Of  24  paired  observations 
(individuals  or  groups  observed  by 
both  air  and  ground  personnel),  ini- 
tial visual  contact  was  made  by  a 
ground  observer  in  eight  instances  and 
by  an  airborne  observer  in  ten  in- 
stances. Hence,  ground  and  aircraft 
observers  apparently  were  equally 
adept  at  initially  sighting  whales.  Of 
the  24  paired  sightings,  the  aerial 
observers    were    able    to    correct    the 


Paul  N.  Sund  is  with  the  Pacific 
Environmental  Group,  National 
Marine  Fisheries  Service, 
NOAA,  Monterey,  CA  93940. 
John  L.  O'Connor,  P.O.  Box 
1942,  Newport  Beach,  C A  92660. 


51 


numbers  recorded  by  the  shore  ob- 
servers six  times.  In  three  instances  of 
poor  (white  caps  and  4-6  foot  swells) 
sea  state  conditions,  on  the  other  hand, 
the  aerial  observers  were  unable  to 
contirm  groups  or  individuals  sighted 
by  the  shore  observers.  These  data 
suggest  that,  although  aerial  observa- 
tions may  be  more  directly  limited  by 
sea  conditions,  they  are  useful  in 
quantifying  the  number  of  whales  in 
groups.  Further,  resolution  of  num- 
bers present  is  faster  from  the  air 
than  from  shore.  (It  often  takes  the 
shore  observers  up  to  30  minutes  to 
determine  their  count  for  a  given 
group — during  which  time  the  in- 
dividuals in  the  group  may  dissociate 
or  join  with  others.) 

Resolution  of  numbers  of  whales 
in  groups  is  more  rapid  and  apparent- 
ly more  accurate  from  the  air  than 
from  shore.  With  a  professional  spot- 
ter pilot  working  a  limited  area — 
such  as  that  scanned  by  the  shore  ob- 
servers— in  good  sea  state  conditions, 
essentially  no  whales  will  pass  unno- 
ticed. "Misses"  by  the  aerial  observers 
were  due  to  leaving  the  area  premature- 
ly in  order  to  accomplish  other  tasks; 
had  the  aircraft  been  consistently  in 
the  shore  observers'  area  (and  immedi- 
ately outside  to  prevent  unnoticed 
passage  of  individuals  offshore)  none 
would  have  gone  unrecorded. 

The  aerial  observers  made  ."^O  ob- 
servations of  whales  involving  149 
animals.  All  these  observations  oc- 
curred within  7  miles  of  the  shoreline, 
even  though  the  area  surveyed  ex- 
tended to  25  miles  seaward.  Of  these 
sightings.  98  percent  were  within  5 
miles  of  shore.  96  percent  within  .^ 
miles,  and  94  percent  within  I  mile. 
Distances  were  estimated  by  making 
timed  runs  at  constant  speed  from 
pi>sitions  offshore  to  the  coastline. 
The  observations  of  this  study  tend 
to  confirm  Rice  and  Wolmans  state- 
ment that  95  percent  of  the  whales 
pass  within  1.9  km  (1.2  miles)  ot  the 
shore  near  the  Yankee  Point  site. 

Gray  whales  have  been  reported 
interacting  with  other  marine  mam- 
mals   by    Leatherwood    (1974b).     but 


during  this  study  no  other  marine 
mammals  were  observed  "associating" 
directly  with  gray  whales.  Feeding 
behavior  was  observed  on  two  occa- 
sions. A  calf  was  seen  accompanied  by 
an  adult.  These  two  latter  observa- 
tions are  of  particular  note  and  the 
senior  author  intends  to  publish  the 
details  elsewhere.' 


'  Sund.  P  N  Manuscript  Evidence  of  feeding 
during  migration  and  of  an  early  birtti  of  the 
California  gray  whale 


LITERATURE  CITED 


Leatherwood.  J.  S.  l'J74a.  Aerial  observa- 
tions of  migrating  gray  whales.  Eschrich- 
liiis  rubusitts,  otT  southern  California 
(1969-1972).   Mar.   Fish,   Rev.   36(4):45-49. 

.      1974h.     A    note   on   gray    whale 

behavioral  interactions  with  other  marine 
mammals.    Mar.    Fish.    Rev.    36(4):49-?0. 

Levenson,  C.  1968.  Factors  aftecling  bio- 
logical observations  from  the  ASWEPS 
aircraft.  U.S.  Naval  Oceanogr.  Off.,  In- 
formal Rep.No.  68-102,  6  p. 

Rice.  D.  W.,  and  A.  A.  Wolnian.  1971. 
The  life  history  and  ecology  of  the  gray 
whale  {Eschnchtnts  nihusius).  Am.  Soc. 
Mammal.,  Spec.  Publ.  No.  .3.  142  p. 


MFR  Paper  1057.  From  Marine  Fisheries  Review,  Vol. 
36.  No.  4.  April  1974.  Copies  of  this  paper,  in  limited 
numbers,  are  available  from  D83.  Technical  Information 
Division.  Environmental  Science  Information  Center, 
NOAA,  Washington.  DC  20235. 


MFR  PAPER  1058 


Telemetering  of  Temperature  and  Depth  Data 
From  a  Free  Ranging  Yearling  California  Gray 
Whale,  Eschrichtius  robustus 


W.  E.  EVANS 


ABSTRACT 

//;  /y6(S'  //((■  iiinlinr  iiiiluilcti  a  .scries  nf  Miii.lics  iisiiii;  icidic  iniii.sniillcr.s  lo 
jollow  ilw  nidViincnls  iiiitl  sliidy  ilw  cliviiii^  hchiivior  ol  snuill  Icollwil  whales. 
This  paper  dc.si  ril'cs  the  miulifu  iilit'irs  tij  this  ccpiipniciU  necessary  lo  use  this 
Icchniquc  on  larj^cr  wTnilcs.  in  this  case  a  yciirliiii;  California  ,t,'/((y  wliale, 
Eschrichtius  robustus.  In  addition  lo  the  iransinission  of  positional  data,  i.e. 
azinuilh  anil  deplh  of  dive,  the  ittsininicnlalion  pnekaf^e  used  in  this  study  was 
desii;ncd  lo  trausnui  environmental  data  (tcinperaturc-al-depihl.  The  animal 
used  in  this  study,  a  Jemalc  E.  robustus,  U(/.v  captured  on  /.■?  March  1971.  in 
Smnimon's  Lagoon.  Baja  California  Siir.  Mexico,  hy  Sea  World,  Inc.,  San  Diei.;o, 
and  released  on  13  March  1972.  at  hit.  32''4I.5'N.  lonn-  1 17^^ 20.5' W  {off  Point 
Loina.  San  Die.i^o.  Calif.)  hy  the  Naval  Undersea  Center  (NUCI.  San  Diei;o. 
Rtulio  contact  was  maintained  with  the  animal  iinlil  .'^  May  1972.  Deplh  oj  dive 
and  leinperalure-al-deptli  data  w  ere  idnlniuouslv  mniiiloreil  for  a  24-hoiir  period. 


INTRODUCTION 

The  present  stud\  is  an  extension 
of  a  6-year  research  program  designed 
io  evaluate  the  feasibility  of  usmg 
medium-si/ed  lo  large  cetaceans,  in- 
strumented with  a  combination  data 
collection     and     transmission    system. 


to  measure  physical  oceanographic 
parameters  at  various  depths,  and  to 
evaluate  the  relationship  of  these 
parameters  to  cetaceans'  movement 
patterns  and  secondary  productivity 
(Evans.  1970.  1971.  in  press). 

Because    of   the    impending    release 
of   a    yearling   California   gra\    whale 


52 


W.  E.  Evans  is  with  the  Naval 
LJndersca  Center.  San  Diego, 
C A  92132. 


(Gigi  II)  captured  by  Sea  World,  Inc., 
San  Diego,  on  13  March  1971,  in 
Scammon's  Lagoon.  Baja  California. 
Mexico,  and  the  timing  of  the  northern 
migration  of  CaMfornia  gray  whales 
(March-Aprill,  the  program  was  ac- 
celerated to  take  advantage  of  this 
opportunity.  The  prototype  data  trans- 
mission/acquisition system  had  been 
designed  and  bench-tested  in  anticipa- 
tion of  tests  on  a  Pacific  pilot  whale. 
ClohiccphaUi  cf.  sctiniiiuini.  in  mid- 
summer 1972.  The  unit  was  repack- 
aged and  the  test  dates  subsequently 
moved  up  to  coincide  with  the  planned 
release  of  the  Sea  World  captive  year- 
ling gray  whale  which  was  scheduled 
for  13  March  1972.  It  was  then  field 
tested  attached  to  the  ,Sea  World  gray 
whale  when  she  was  relased  at  0905 
hours  at  lat.  32°4I.5'N.  long.  117° 
20,5'W  into  a  group  of  four  to  five 
California  gray  whales  moving  north. 

DATA  PARAMETERS 

Since  one  of  our  primary  purposes 
for  using  a  data  system  attached  to  a 
cetacean  was  to  measure  environ- 
mental parameters  associated  with  the 
animafs  movements  below  the  air-sea 
interface,  the  instrumentation  used 
must  indicate  the  depth  at  which  the 
measurement  was  made.  The  follow- 
ing parameters  were  considered  as  po- 
tential indicators  of  productivity  and 
important  correlates  of  cetacean 
movement; 

1.  Temperature  at  depth. 

2.  Ocean    current   speed   at   surface 
and  at  depth. 

3.  Salinity-derived     from     conduc- 
tivity measurements 

4.  Dissolved  gases: 

a.  O2: 

b.  No; 

c.  FreeC02. 

5.  Light; 

a.  Absorption  loss  due  to  molec- 
ular absorption,  particulate 
matter; 


Figure  1. — Block  diagram  of  telemetry  transmitter  attactied  to  yearling  California  gray  wtiale  (Gigi). 


b.  Backscattering   from    particu- 
late matter; 

c.  Light  level  at  depth. 

After  consideration  of  all  these 
parameters,  temperature  was  selected 
as  the  most  desirable  for  this  phase  of 
the  program  because;  1)  methods  of 
measurement  are  straightforward  elec- 
tronically. 2)  considerable  bathyther- 
mal  data  exist  for  the  California  C  ur- 
rent  region,  3)  data  transmitted  from 
the  instrumented  animal  could  be 
easily  checked  by  use  of  currently 
available  expendable  bathythermo- 
graphs, and  4)  a  great  deal  of  data 
relating  the  thermal  structure  of  the 
water  columns  to  primary  and  secon- 
dary productivity  are  available  in  the 
scientific  literature  (e,g.  Eckman, 
1953). 

INSTRUMENTATION 

Data  Transmission  System 

The  data  acquisition  system  mount- 
ed on  the  yearling  gray  whale  pro- 
vided measurement  of  the  depth  of 
each  dive  and  the  water  temperature 
at  that  depth,  and  served  as  a  radio 
beacon  for  tracking.  Data  measured 
was  telemetered  by  an  1  I  meter  trans- 
mitter (27.585  megaHertz)  to  either  a 
surface   vessel,   shore   station,   or   air- 


craft-based receiving  set  which  would 
also  demodulate  the  data  being  trans- 
mitted. Directional  information  for 
tracking  was  obtained  by  a  special  fast 
response  automatic  direction  finder 
developed  several  years  ago  specifical- 
ly for  this  type  of  application  (Ocean 
Applied  Research  Corporation,  San 
Diego,  Model  ADF210).i 

A  block  diagram  of  the  telemetry 
transmitter  is  shown  in  Figure  I .  Func- 
tion and  operation  are  as  follows; 

Pressure  is  measured  by  a  semi- 
conductor strain-gauge  bridge  excited 
with  constant  current.  The  output 
voltage  is  amplified  by  three  opera- 
tional amplifiers  connected  in  an 
"instrumentation  amplifier"  configura- 
tion and  the  peak  pressure  reading 
stored  (remembered)  on  a  capacitor 
which  is  followed  by  an  insulated-gate 
field-effect  transistor  (LET).  This 
peak  detector  is  inside  the  feedback 
loop  of  the  amplifier  which  maintains 
accuracy  and  also  yields  a  digital 
zero  at  point  A  when  pressure  is  de- 
creasing from  the  peak  depth.  This 
level  is  used  to  hold  the  temperature 
reading. 


'  Use  of  trade  names  in  this  publication  does 
not  imply  endorsement  of  commercial  products 
by  the  National  Marine  Fisheries  Service 


53 


Temperature  is  measured  by  a  therm- 
istor composite  which  is  pressure 
protected  in  a  thin-wall  stainless  steel 
tube.  The  thermistors'  conductance  is 
measured  by  an  "operational  trans- 
conductance  amplifier"  (OTA)  whose 
output  is  gated  by  the  digital  signal 
from  the  pressure  sensor.  The  output 
of  the  OTA  drives  a  capacitor  which 
serves  as  a  temperature-reading  mem- 
ory. It  is  also  followed  by  an  insulated- 
gate  FET  whose  high  input  impedance 
prevents  memory  discharge. 

These  two  voltage  analogs  are  con- 
verted to  frequency  analogs  by  voltage 
controlled  oscillators  (VCO).  The  fil- 
tered outputs  of  the  VCO's  are 
summed  and  the  resulting  composite 
fed  to  the  amplitude  modulator  of  the 
3-watt  peak  transmitter. 

A  programmer  is  also  included  to 
provide  a  4-second  data  transmission 
time  when  the  animal  first  surfaces 
followed  by  a  series  of  short  pulses 
which  are  adequate  for  the  tracking 
system.  A  seawater  connection  be- 
tween the  antenna  tip  and  the  instru- 
ment case  generates  a  delayed  reset 
for  all  capacitor  memories  and  the 
programmer. 

In  the  package  used  on  the  yearling 
gray  whale  two  batteries  were  included 


Figure  2.  —  Photograph  of  the  Ocean  Applied  Re- 
search Corporation  data  transmitter  Model  WDT- 
920  attached  to  the  Sea  World  yearling  gray 
whale  (Gigi)  just  prior  to  release.  (Photo  courtesy 
of  J.  S.  Leatherwood.) 


Figure  3. — Aerial  photograph  of  lest  animal  taken  on  16  March  1972.  as  she  was  swimming  through 
kelp  beds  off  San  Clemente,  California.  (Note  kelp  trailing  behind  the  transmitter  package.)  (Photo 
courtesy  of  J.  S.  Leatherwood.) 


in  the  system.  One  had  a  capacity  of 
1.^  ampere  hours  and  was  used  to 
power  all  electronics  which  were  on 
when  the  animal  was  at  the  surface. 
The  second,  smaller,  battery,  which 
had  a  1.2  ampere  hours  capacity, 
powered  the  depth  and  temperature 
instrumentation  continuously.  The  ex- 
pected life  of  the  smaller  battery  was 
approximately  I  month  while  the 
larger  battery  with  its  greater  capacity 
and  reduced  duty  cycle  should  con- 
tinue to  provide  tracking  transmis- 
sions for  as  much  as  9  months.  The 
entire  system  packaged  and  attached 
to  the  whale  is  shown  in  Figure  2. 
During  the  first  month  of  operation. 


V 


'/,  WAVE 
MARINE  ANTENNA 


BAND 
PASS 
FILTERS 


TEMPERATURE 
DISCRIMINATOR 

n 

DEPTH 
DISCRIMINATOR 

_ 

- 

DIGITAL 
READ  OUT 

TAPE 
RECORDER 


Figure  4.  —  Block   diagram  of  the  telemetry  data 
receiving  and  recording  system. 


performance  of  the  Instrument/Bea- 
con package  was  satisfactory  with  the 
notable  exception  of  transmission 
range  which  was  initially  more  than 
25  miles.  Subsequent  tests  indicate 
that  the  antenna,  which  is  a  top  loaded 
stainless  steel  whip  antenna,  had  sus- 
tained some  damage.  The  animal  was. 
on  two  occasions,  observed  swimming 
through  kelp  and  kelp  was  seen  hang- 
ing on  the  antenna.  Figure  3.  Cali- 
fornia gray  whales  are  also  known  to 
rub  on  the  bottom,  a  behavior  which 
could  have  abraded  or  even  severed 
the  loading  coil  from  the  antenna, 
drastically  reducing  its  radiation  ef- 
ficiency. The  estimated  useful  range 
of  the  damaged  system  was  on  the 
order  of  10  miles. 

The  original  antenna  design  em- 
ployed on  beacon  transmitters  for  ma- 
rine mammals  (specifically  porpoises) 
was  an  adaptation  from  a  design  which 
had  been  in  use  for  some  time  on 
radio  beacons  used  for  the  recovery 
of  oceanographic  instruments.  It  con- 


54 


Figure  5. — Automatic  direction  finding  antenna  (loops)  and  data  acquisition  antenna  (whip)  attached 
to  the  belly  of  a  U.S.  Navy  S-2  tracker  aircraft.  (Photo  courtesy  of  J.  S.  Leatherwood.) 


sisted  of  a  solid  fiberglass  tapered  rod 
onto  which  was  wound  a  conductor 
and  loading  coil.  An  aluminum  tip 
served  both  as  a  seawater  contact  and 
as  a  section  whose  length  could  be 
trimmed  tor  peak  field  strength.  A 
proprietars  coating  protected  the  con- 
ductor and  coil  from  seawater.  The 
antenna  was  entirely  successful  on 
Delphiinis  species  (Evans,  1971).  but 
problems  were  encountered  when  a 
similar  design  was  used  on  captive 
whales  such  as  pilot  whales  and  killer 
whales.  The  captive  whales  invariably 
broke  the  antennas  by  rubbing  on 
structures  or  boats  and  in  the  instance 
of  the  release  of  a  pilot  whale  into  the 
wild,  the  antenna  was  broken  by  sea- 
weed. Subsequently,  a  spring-wire 
antenna  was  designed  which  could  be 
severely  bent  without  catastrophic 
damage  and  has  been  used  success- 
fully on  the  aforementioned  whales 
(Martin.  Evans,  and  Bowers.  1971). 
This  type  of  antenna  was  used  on  the 
gray  whale  pack.  Subsequent  simula- 
tions of  various  types  of  damage  to 
this  antenna  indicate  that  modifica- 
tions would  be  in  order  before  em- 
ploying this  type  of  antenna  again. 
Specifically,  the  arrangement  of  the 
spring  at  the  base  should  be  changed 
to  allow  the  antenna  to  be  bent  double 
against  the  transmitter  case  without 
damage.  The  antenna  should  be  length- 
ened somewhat  to  reduce  the  variation 
in  impedance  for  a  given  variation  in 
the  relative  position  of  the  ground 
plane  (sea  surface)  and  the  loading 
coil  should  be  fully  encapsulated  in 
the  nonmetallic  antenna's  structure  to 
completely  eliminate  the  abrasion 
damage  potential. 


Data  Receiving  System 

The  data  receiving  and  recording 
system  illustrated  in  Figure  4  was 
originally  tested  on  board  the  NUC 
RV  Cape.  Subsequent  to  the  initial 
tracking  and  data  acquisition  attempts 


following  the  release  of  the  whale  on 
13  March  1972.  the  system  was  placed 
on  board  a  U.S.  Navy  S-2  tracker 
aircraft.  The  antenna  mounting  con- 
figuration used  on  this  type  of  aircraft 
is  shown  in  Figure  5.  The  whip  anten- 
na is  shown  in  the  retracted  mode.  The 
loop  antenna  used  in  conjunction  with 
the  automatic  direction  finding  system 
is  adjustable  and  was  aligned  prior  to 
every  flight  by  using  a  shore-based 
radio  beacon. 

Several  relocations  of  the  animal 
were  made  using  this  system.  The  short 
transmission  range  of  the  damaged 
transmitter  system  attached  to  the 
whale  seriously  limited  the  acquisition 
of  temperature  and  depth  data  from 
the     aircraft-mounted     system.    Tests 


>-*%►  .„ 


r*-^?25B»-^ 


/-""':.'  pz::^ 


f^% 


-P 


Figure  6. — California  gray  whale  breaking  the 
the  back.  The  normal  sequence  of  a  blow  is 
note  exposure  of  the  dorsal  ridge.  (Photo  courtesy 


surface  exposing  only  the  head  and  fore-part  of 
shown  right  to  left  at  the  bottom  of  the  figure, 
of  J.  S.  Leatherwood.) 


55 


Gray  Whale  Relocation  Records 


Enlargement 
Of  ThiB  Area 


Figure  7. —  Map  of  California  coastline  showing 
(Gigl)  13  March-5  May  1972. 

conducted  following  the  release  of  the 
whale  using  a  similar  data  transmitter 
with  one-third  the  power  of  the  system 
used  on  the  test  animal  and  a  modified 
antenna  have  yielded  data  acquisition 
ranges  up  to  40  nautical  miles. 

RESULTS 

During  the  initial  2  hours  after  re- 
lease of  the  test  animal,  signals  were 
very  intermittent  and  seldom  longer 
than  2  seconds  in  duration.  Ohserva- 
tions  lead  us  to  believe  this  was  a 
behavioral  problem  since  the  animal 
frequently  broke  the  surface  of  the 
water  showing  onl\  her  blow  hole  and 
mid-portion  of  her  back  as  illustrated 
in  Figure  6.  Since  the  data  transmitter 
was  mounted  on  the  dorsal  ridge  (on 
the  last  half  of  the  body)  the  antenna 
either  did  not  break  the  surface  of  the 
water,  thus  no  transmission,  or  only 
the  tip  of  the  antenna  broke  the  sur- 
face, resulting  in  a  very  short  duration 
transmission. 


locations    o(    the    Sea    World    yearling    gray    whale 

This  resulted  in  limited  data  recep- 
tion during  the  first  2  hours  after  re- 
lease and  subsequent  loss  of  the  ani- 
mal's location  and  movement  pattern. 
Those  signals  over  2  seconds  in  dura- 
tion that  were  received  during  this 
time  period  did  indicate  temperature- 
at-depth  values  reasonable  for  the  lo- 
cation and  time  of  year  (e.g..  above 
20  meters  temperatures  of  13°-I4°C 
and  below  20  meters  a  temperature 
of  7.4C').  A  20-meter  isothermal  layer 
is  not  uncommon  at  this  location. 
Since  the  quality  of  radio  signal  ac- 
quisition was  quite  poor,  the  search 
from  the  RV  Cupc  was  abandoned  in 
favor  of  an  aerial  search.  The  animal 
was  relocated  on  i.^i  March  between 
1300  and  1500  hours  on  a  bearing  of 
320°T  south  of  Oceanside.  The  animal 
was  relocated  again  on  16  March 
close  inshore  off  San  C'lemente.  Calif., 
working  slowly  north.  The  photograph 
shown  in  Figure  6  was  taken  at  this 
time.  On  this  flight  and  those  that 
followed,    although    the   animal    could 


be  easily  located,  acquisition  of  use- 
able temperature-at-depth  data  was 
limited  I)  by  the  long  time  interval 
between  adequate  exposure  of  the  an- 
tenna, and  2)  by  the  apparent  short 
range  of  the  transmissions  received. 
Areas  of  visual  relocation  and  radio 
contact  from  16  March  1972  to  5  May 
1972.  are  illustrated  in  Figure  7. 

After  a  period  of  5  to  6  days,  the 
animal's  swimming  pattern  changed 
and  longer  and  more  frequent  trans- 
missions were  being  received.  In  order 
to  verify  these  observations  and.  if 
possible,  to  collect  temperature-at- 
depth  data  over  a  24-hour  period,  the 
RV  Ciipc  left  San  Diego  at  approxi- 
mately 1600  hours  on  20  March  1972 
for  the  Dana  Point-San  Clemente, 
Calif,  area.  At  IS4()  hours.  3.'^  nautical 
miles  from  San  Clemente.  Calif.,  we 
acquired  weak  signals  from  the  animal 
bearing  340°T.  At  2300  hours,  signal 
level  had  increased  and  we  were  re- 
ceiving bearing  and  temperature-at- 
depth  data.  Initial  data  indicated  tem- 
peratures of  12°-I4°C  at  depths  of 
l.'^-20  meters.  At  2350  hours  the 
animals  diving  behavior  changed  and 
indicated  some  dives  to  depths  of  170 
meters.  Triangulation  placed  the  ani- 
mal at  a  location  approximately  on  the 
100  fathom  curve.  1.7  nautical  miles 
off  Laguna  Beach.  Calif.  (Aliso  Can- 
yon). Although  the  depths  recorded 
at  this  location  were  realistic  if  the 
animal  was  diving  to  the  bottom,  the 
water  temperatures  at  those  depths 
appeared    to    be    anomalous.    At    this 


HktlMUM  DOWH  TIME  -   16  m 


Figure  8. — Mean  down  times  and  depths  of  dive 
as  a  function  ol  time  of  day  recorded  20-21 
IVIarch  1972. 


56 


time  of  the  year  one  would  expect  sur- 
face temperatures  between  12°  and 
i4°C.  and  temperatures  at  170  meters 
of  7°-8°C  or  less.  Data  from  the 
animal,  however,  indicated  tempera- 
tures-at-depths  of  100-170  meters 
ranging  from  10°  to  14°C.  If  these 
levels  were  indeed  accurate,  a  signifi- 
cant temperature  inversion  layer  was 
present.  This  cruise  was  terminated  at 
2100  hours  on  21  March  1972.  after 
having  recorded  data  for  approximate- 
ly 24  hours.  In  addition  to  the  temper- 
ature-at-depth  data,  the  following 
observations  were  made: 

1.  The  animal  was  offshore  1-2 
nautical  miles  after  sunset,  moved 
inshore  100-200  meters  from  the 
beach  post -sunrise. 

2.  The  diving  pattern  at  night  was 
regular,  as  compared  to  an  erratic 
pattern  during  daylight  hours. 

3.  The  animal  was  observed  in 
Dana  Cove  along  with  three  other 
gray  whales  of  a  similar  size  range. 
All  four  animals  left  the  Cove  in  late 
afternoon. 

4.  The  mean  time  between  trans- 
missions was  significantly  longer  from 
1600  to  0400  hours  than  during  the 
remainder  of  the  day  (Figure  8). 

Since  transmissions  were  more  pre- 
dictable after  sunset,  our  aircraft  data 
acquisition  flights  were  scheduled  at 
night.  Under  this  plan,  data  were  col- 
lected on  28  and  29  March  from  the 
S-2  tracker  aircraft  in  the  vicinity  of 
Dana  Point,  Calif.  The  recorded  data 
from  these  flights  indicated  dives  of 
50-80  meters  and  temperatures  of 
I2°-14°C.  The  observations  that  the 
animal  moved  offshore  (1-4  miles)  at 
night  were  verified. 

No  readily  apparent  explanation 
was  available  for  the  relatively  high 
temperatures  recorded  at  depth  on 
20-21  March.  To  check  on  these 
measurements,  the  RV  Sen  Sec  was 
sent  to  the  Dana  Point  area  to  work 
from  6  April  1972  through  10  April 
1972.  equipped  with  an  expendable 
bathythermograph  (XBT)  system  ca- 
pable of  measuring  temperature  versus 
depth  over  a  range  of  0°C-30°C  to 
depths    of    450    meters.    During    the 


Figure  9. — A  composite  of  three  expendable 
bathytliermograph  plots  collected  2  miles  oil 
Dana  Point,  Calilornia,  at  1700  hours  on  10 
April  1972. 


period  6-7  April,  the  area  south  of 
Dana  Point  was  searched  and  no  con- 
tact was  made  with  the  animal,  al- 
though one  small  7-8  meter  whale  was 
sighted.  The  XBT  data,  however,  in- 
dicated surface  temperatures  of  approx- 
imately 13°C  which  dropped  to  6°C 
at  300  meters,  with  no  obvious  Iher- 
mocline  or  temperature  inversion. 
Late  on  7  April,  a  search  was  made 
north  of  the  Dana  Point  area  by  auto- 
mobile and  signal  acquisition  was 
made  from  the  Huntington  Beach  pier 
at  1600  hours.  Observers  on  the  pier 
claimed  to  have  sighted  a  small  Cali- 
fornia gray  whale  with  a  radio  pack 
swimming  north  100  meters  off  the 
end  of  the  oi'^'-  at  1000  hours  on  that 
same  day.  Our  signal  acquisition  was 
on  a  bearing  of  280°T  which  would 


1               1 

J 

- 

••-"(• 

- 

- 

J 

lOCAIION.   \.J   mlieS  OFF 

LAGUNA  lEACH. 

' 

j 

CAlIf 
Il*tl.   IBOS 

/ 

■  ANGE  TEMPCRATUIt 
ATDCPTM   RCCOIDfD 

/ 

HIS,   10  m  7]   TO 
0830,   31  in  73 

Figure  10.  —  A  composite  of  three  expendable 
bathythermograph  plots  collected  1.7  miles  off 
Laguna  Beach,  California,  at  1800  hours  on  10 
April  1972,  compared  to  temperature  versus  depth 
data  collected  from  Gigi  on  20  March  1972. 


place  the  animal  between  Seal  Beach 
and  Santa  Catalina  Island. 

On  10  April  1972.  the  RV  Sea  See 
started  a  search  north  of  Dana  Point 
at  1600  hours.  The  first  XBT  station 
was  at  1700  hours.  2  miles  off  Dana 
Point.  A  plot  of  temperature  versus 
depth  representative  of  the  three  mea- 
surements taken  at  this  location  is 
presented  in  Figure  9.  The  vessel 
moved  north  to  approximately  the 
same  location  where  the  temperature- 
at-depth  data  were  collected  from  the 
whale  on  20  March.  Of  major  interest 
here  is  indication  from  the  XBT  data 
that  a  rather  significant  temperature 
inversion  did  exist  in  this  area.  A  plot 
of  the  XBT  station  taken  at  1800 
hours  on  10  April.  2  miles  off  Laguna 
Beach  compared  to  the  temperature- 
at-depth  data  transmitted  from  the 
whale  is  illustrated  in  Figure  10.  It 
should  be  noted  that  although  the  re- 
lationship between  the  XBT  and  whale 
data  appears  to  be  comparable  at 
depths  of  100-200  meters,  these  are 
preliminary  data.  Conclusion  should 
not  be  made  without  further  verifica- 
tion of  the  thermal  inversion  shown 
in  Figure  10.  It  is  possible  that  the 
outfall  of  the  San  Onofre  nuclear 
power  plant  north  of  this  location  is 
dumping  warm  water  back  into  the 
sea.  It  has  also  been  shown  that  at 
this  time  of  year  the  mean  geostrophic 
flow  at  200  meters  has  northbound 
components  (Wyllie,  1966).  Depend- 
ing on  the  temperature,  volume,  and 
depth  of  the  San  Onofre  effluent  it  is 
not  inconceivable  that  inversions  such 
as  that  shown  in  Figure  9  could  result. 
This,  however,  is  pure  speculation  at 
this  point. 

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS 

This  study  was  accomplished  under 
funding  from  NASA.  Defense  Pur- 
chase request  A-70496A,  RTOP  160- 
75-81,  Task  01,  Ames  Research  Cen- 
ter, Moffett  Field,  California.  Addi- 
tional funding  support  was  received 
from  the  Naval  Undersea  Center,  San 
Diego,  California,  Independent  Re- 
search project  ROOO-OI.  All  of  the 
electronic   equipment   used  to  instru- 


57 


nient  the  whale  and  subsequently 
track  and  obtain  data  Ironi  it  was  de- 
signed and  manufactured  by  Ocean 
Applied  Research  Corporation.  San 
Diego,  California.  Hugh  Martin  and 
Romaine  Maiefskl.  both  from  this 
organization,  actively  participated  in 
the  attachment  of  the  instrumentation 
to  the  animal  and  the  initial  stages  of 
tracking.  J.  S.  Leatherwood.  J.  Hall. 
Bruce  Parks,  and  L.  McKinley.  of  the 
Naval  Undersea  Center.  .San  Diego. 
California,  and  the  Commanding  Of- 
ficer of  the  RV  Cape  and  his  crew 
were  directly  instrumental  in  the  suc- 
cess of  this  project.  The  radio  contact 
with  the  instrumented  whale  on  5  May 
1972  was  accomplished  by  Paul  Se- 
besta.  NASA  Ames  Research  Center. 
Moffett  Field.  Calif.,  using  equipment 
supplied  b\  the  author. 


due  to  the  destruction  or  displacement 
of  melanin  in  the  epidermis  of  the 
area  treated. 

LITERATURE  CITED 

Eckman.  S.  1953.  Zoogeography  ol  llie 
sea.  Sidgwick  and  Jackson  Ltd..  Lond.. 
417p. 

Evans.  W.  E.  1970.  Uses  of  advanced 
space  technology  and  upgrading  ihe  future 
study  of  oceanology.  AIAA  7th  Annual 
Mtg.  and  Tech.  Display.  Houston,  Tex., 
Pap.  No.  70- 1:?.^,  p.  I-.^. 


.      1971.     Orientation    behavior    of 

delphinids;  Radio  telemelric  studies.  Ann. 
N.Y.  Acad.Sci.  188:142-160. 

.      In        press.      Radio        lelenietnc 

studies  of  two  species  of  small  odonlocete 
cetaceans.  In  W.  E.  Schevill  (editor). 
The  Whale  Problem.  Harvard  Press, 
Cambridge,  pp.  385-394. 

Martin,  H.,  W.  E.  Evans,  and  C.  A.  Bowers. 
1971.  Methods  for  radio  tracking  marine 
mammals  in  the  open  sea.  IEEE  Eng.  in 
the  Ocean  Environ.  Conf..  p.  44-49. 

Wylhe.  J.  G.  1966.  Geostrophic  How  of 
the  California  Current  at  the  surface  and 
at  200  meters.  Calif.  Coop.  Oceanic  Fish. 
Invest.  Atlas  No.  4.  ,\iii  +  288  charts. 


MFR  Paper  1058.  From  Marine  Fisheries  Review,  Vol. 
36,  No.  4,  April  1974.  Copies  of  ttiis  paper,  in  limited 
numbers,  are  available  from  D83.  Technical  Information 
Division,  Environmental  Science  Information  Center, 
NCAA.  Washington.  DC  20235. 


MFR  PAPER  1059 


POSTSCRIPT 

During  the  period  2  January  197.^- 
21  March  1973.  the  author  investigated 
37  reported  resightings  of  Gigi.  Al- 
though most  of  these  reports  did  not 
check  out,  on  5-6  January,  a  Captain 
Paul  Roth.  USN.  and  a  Mr.  and  Mrs. 
Sherwood  of  San  Diego  independently 
described  behavior  of  a  9-10  meter 
California  gray  whale  sighted  inside 
the  kelp  off  the  Sunset  Cliffs  area  of 
Point  Loma.  San  Diego.  California. 
In  both  cases  the  whale,  light  in  color. 
approached  close  to  small  vessels  less 
than  10  meters,  rolled,  and  frolicked 
around.  On  15  March  we  received  a 
report  from  the  MV  Loiii;  Bench 
Prince  that  a  whale  of  similar  size 
and  with  white  tail  Hukes  (see  Figure 
3)  and  a  fiO  cm  X  60  cm  square  white 
scar  behind  the  blow  hole  was  sighted 
frolicking  around  the  vessel  by  178 
whale  watchers.  The  location  of  this 
sighting  was  3-4  miles  off  Point 
Fermin.  This  latter  sighting  is  es- 
pecially interesting  since  on  6  March 
1972,  one  week  prior  to  release,  Gigi 
II  was  branded  using  cryogenics  with 
a  60  cm  x  60  cm  mark,  midline  on  the 
back  just  posterior  to  the  blow  hole. 
This  form  of  marking,  called  "freeze 
branding.  "  results  in  a  white  scarring 


Capture  and  Harnessing  of  Young 

California  Gray  Whales,  Eschrichtius  robustus 

KENNETH  S.  NORRIS  antd  ROGER  L,  GENTRY 

ABSTRACT 

1  lii\  paper  reptirls  mi  the  tleuiils  i>f  capture ,  liarnessiiii;.  ircukiiii;.  ami  lianiess 
release  for  three  suckluiii  i:ra\  u/ki/cv.  These  lesls  are  ihe  firsl  steps  in  a  pr(ii;raiii 
Id  ilevelop  new  means  af  clala  acqiiisilion  and  recovery  jri'in  wliales  diirini;  iheir 
mii^raiiinis.  I)  is  hoped  hy  tliese  means  u>  develop  new  infornuilion  ahoiil 
popiilaliini  routes  and  hence  population  immhcrs  to  assist  nianai;einent.  Capture 
was  hy  tail  noosiiii^  and  liead  nelliiii;  from  a  fishins;  vessel  equipped  with  a 
swonljisli  plank.  The  liarness.  placed  on  the  inptive  ashore,  was  held  in  place 
over  tlie  pectoral  fins  and  hcuk  hv  means  of  a  pair  of  inelal  plates  held  together 
hy  a  \oliihle  nnc.;ne\inm  holt .  Trackiiii^  was  hy  radio. 


INTRODUCTION 

Informed  whale  management  re- 
quires adequate  knowledge  of  popula- 
tion numbers.  Uncertainly  about  mi- 
gratory pathways  and  population  mi.\- 
ing  makes  determination  of  such  num- 
bers uncertain  for  some  whales  such 
as  the  humpback  {Mci^aptera  novaeaii- 
Siliae).  the  blue  whale  {Balaenoptera 
iniisciihis).  the  (in  whale  iBalaenop- 
lerii   phxsaliis).    and   the    minkc   whale 


{Balaenopiera  aciorostraia).  Thus  pre- 
cise information  on  migration  routes 
of  these  and  other  marine  mammals 
would  materially  assist  in  the  develop- 
ment of  sound  management  practice 
(Anonymous,  in  press). 

In  spite  of  decades  of  work  with 
Discovers  and  other  tagging  methods 
(Clarke,  1957)  our  knowledge  of  whale 
migration  remains  highly  incomplete. 
Because  such  information  is  needed 
for  some   protected   species,   new   tag- 


58 


Figure  1. —  Map  ol  capture  locality.  Nuinbers 
indicate  the  capture  sites  for  the  ttiree  harnessed 
animals. 


ging  methods  that  do  not  require  kill- 
ing are  now  required.  These  methods 
seem  to  fall  into  two  categories;  (1) 
those  involving  the  capture  of  whales, 
placement  of  harnesses  and  equipment 
on  them,  tracking  along  the  whale's 
route,  and  subsequent  release  and  re- 
covery of  data  packages;  and  (2)  those 
involving  placement  of  data  or  tele- 
metering packages  on  whales  without 
capture,  followed  by  tracking. 

The  first  method  will  allow  data 
collection  from  a  few  animals,  while 
the  latter  will  presumably  allow  less 
complete  data  collection  from  more 
animals  and  from  those  species  that 
cannot  be  captured.  The  tests  de- 
scribed here  are  of  the  first  sort;  that 
is.  they  involve  capture  and  harness- 
ing. The  experiments  of  Evans  (this 
number  of  Marine  Fisheries  Review) 
with  Gigi  are  also  of  this  sort,  though 
surgical  attachment  rather  than  har- 
nessing was  used. 

We  chose  our  subject,  the  California 
gray  whale,  because  large  numbers 
of  suckling  calves  are  available  in 
their  Mexican  breeding  lagoon  during 
January  and  February  of  each  year 
and  because  the  calm  working  condi- 
tions in  the  lagoon  would  assist  these 
preliminary  tests.  We  expect  that  the 


majority  of  results  obtained  on  this 
relatively  well-known  animal  will  be 
applicable  to  more  oceanic  species. 
Our  tests  were  restricted  to  capture, 
harnessing,  and  very  short  term  track- 
ing, since  we  expected  that  our  results 
would  require  harness  redesign  prior 
to  long-term  tracking.  This  proved  to 
be  the  case. 

We  attempted  to  capture  suckling 
animals  only  because  of  the  obvious 
dangers  and  seamanship  problems  pre- 
sented by  adult  whales.  The  rationale 
supporting  this  choice  is  that  a  suck- 
ling calf,  harnessed  and  instrumented, 
should  keep  station  with  its  mother 
and.  hence,  give  a  true  migratory 
route. 

To  our  knowledge  five  baby  gray 
whale  captures  or  handlings  have 
been  reported.  Eberhardt  and  Norris 
(  1964)  report  working  with  a  stranded 
baby  gray  whale  in  Scammon's  Lagoon. 
Robert  Eisner  (pers.  comm.)  detailed 
a  capture  of  a  baby  gray  whale  in 
Scammon's  Lagoon  from  a  small  cata- 
maran by  use  of  a  superficial  harpoon 
followed  by  netting.  David  Kenney 
(pers.  comm.)  directed  the  capture  of 
Eisner's  animal  and  the  capture  and 
transportation  of  Gigi.  the  gray  whale 
calf  caught  in  Scammon's  Lagoon  and 
held  for  12  months  in  Sea  World. 
The  latter  whale  was  captured  with  a 
tail  noose  from  a  small  fishing  vessel 
equipped  with  a  bow  plank.  The  ship 
was  reportedly  damaged  slightly  by 
the  mother  when  the  baby  was  brought 
alongside.  Theodore  Walker  (Cous- 
teau.  1972)  is  shown  manipulating  a 
stranded  baby  gray  whale  in  circum- 
stances much  like  those  discussed  by 
Eberhardt  and  Norris  (1964).  Spencer 
(1973)  reported  on  the  drug-assisted 
capture  of  adult  whales  in  Scammon's 
Lagoon. 

THE  STUDY  SITE 

We  chose  northern  Magdalena 
Bay.  Baja  California  Sur.  Mexico, 
near  Boca  de  Soledad  for  our  work 
because  of  an  abundance  of  whales 
living  in  a  system  of  shallow  bays  and 
rather   narrow   channels   and   because 


Kenneth  S.  Norris  and  Roger  L. 
Gentry  are  associated  with  the 
Coastal  Marine  Laboratory,  Uni- 
versity of  California,  Santa 
Cruz,'  Santa   Cruz,   CA   95064. 


the  Mexican  government  has  recently 
declared  the  better  known  Scammon's 
Lagoon  (Laguna  Ojo  de  Liebre)  a 
whale  reserve.  Headquarters  were  es- 
tablished in  the  small  government 
cannery  town  of  Lopez  Mateos.  which 
fronts  on  the  main  lagoon  channel  8 
km  southeast  of  Boca  de  Soledad 
(Figure  1). 

In  this  region  the  channel  is  about 
800  m  wide  and  averages  1  1  m  deep 
in  mid-channel.  To  the  west  a  low 
ridge  of  dunes  separates  the  lagoon 
from  the  sea.  The  shore  along  the 
dunes  drops  precipitously  into  deep 
water.  The  eastern  bank  is  typically 
bordered  with  dense  mangrove  thick- 
ets often  cut  by  shallow  bays  and 
channels.  The  shore  along  the  man- 
grove coast  usually  shelves  gradually 
over  a  broad  tidal  flat  to  the  main 
channel.  This  difference  in  bottom  con- 
tour proved  crucial  to  capture  and 
harnessing. 

While  whales  were  found  through- 
out the  deeper  parts  of  the  channel, 
one  concentration  occurred  just  in- 
side Boca  de  Soledad  and  another  oc- 
curred at  a  broad  expanse  of  water  just 
north  of  Colina  Coyote  (see  Figure  1). 
It  was  here,  or  somewhat  closer  to 
Lopez  Mateos.  that  our  captures  took 
place.  Our  counts  showed  approximate- 
ly 86  whales  in  residence  in  the  entire 
channel  system.  Most  were  mothers 
and  young,  but  a  few  males  were  pres- 
ent, as  indicated  by  copulations  ob- 
served inside  the  channel. 


WHALE  CAPTURE 
AND  HARNESSING 

Capture  of  suckling  gray  whales 
proved  to  be  rather  simple,  once  the 
basic  techniques  were  established.  Four 
whales  were  netted  in  3  days  (27-29 
January  1973).  One  was  released  be- 
cause it  was  clearly  too  large  for  our 


59 


harnesses.  The  other  three  were  suc- 
cessfully harnessed,  released  to  their 
mothers,  and  tracked.  Capture  was 
performed  from  the  swordfish  boat 
Loiison.  a  15-m  vessel  equipped  with 
a  II  .5  m  welded  aluminum  pipe  pulpit 
projecting  from  its  bow.  During  cap- 
ture Captain  Tim  Houshar  occupied 
the  basket  at  the  end  of  the  pulpit, 
while  the  helmsman  steered  from  a 
remote  station  atop  the  crow's  nest. 
The  vessel  was  maneuvered  behind  a 
whale  pair,  attempting  to  place  the 
netman  in  the  pulpit  over  the  animals 
as  they  surfaced  to  breathe.  At  the 
same  time  another  crewman  in  a 
speedboat  zigzagged  around  and  in 
front  of  the  animals  in  an  attempt  to 
direct  and  distract  them.  This  attempt 
succeeded  often  enough  that  surfacing 
whales  rather  regularly  allowed  the 
pulpit  to  pass  over  them.  The  tendency 
to  surface  beneath  the  pulpit  varied 
rather  widely  from  pair  to  pair  and 
seemed  most  consistent  in  mothers 
with  small  young. 

Once  a  pair  surfaced  under  the  pul- 


pit a  noose  of  1.25  cm  nylon  line  was 
placed  over  the  small  animal's  head  by 
means  of  a  large  metal  hoop  cut 
through  at  its  outer  margin  and  held 
together  inside  a  piece  of  plastic 
tubing  (Figure  2).  The  rather  slow 
speed  of  the  whales  (usually  less  than 
7  knots)  and  the  relatively  long  time 
they  spend  at  the  surface  during  res- 
piration make  this  a  reasonably  sim- 
ple process. 

At  this  point  the  nylon  noose  which 
was  tied  to  the  metal  hoop  with  light 
twine  was  pulled  loose.  The  hoop 
separated  over  the  animal  and  was 
pulled  away,  leaving  the  noose  to  slip 
back  to  the  tail  stock  of  the  little  whale. 
Another  crewman  on  the  pulpit  pulled 
the  noose  tight  over  the  tail  stock.  The 
noosed  young  took  out  a  modest 
amount  of  line,  usually  less  than  100 
m.  before  the  line  was  belayed  around 
a  Samson  post.  The  young  did  not 
dive  for  extended  periods  (less  than 
1  minute)  but  towed  the  vessel  for  a 
time  in  this  position.  The  mother 
always    stayed    in    close    attendance. 


Figure  2. — Capture  of  the  baby  whale.  Note  hoop  and  noose  being  placed  over  the  baby.  Note  also 
the  swordfish  plank  which  is  maneuvered  over  the  mother-young  pair. 


often  sliding  over  the  line  or  coming 
up  underneath  it.  At  times  she  lifted 
the  young  on  her  snout  or  back,  and 
occasionally  she  thrashed  at  the  re- 
straining line  with  her  flukes. 

Once  the  young  animal  began  to 
slow  somewhat,  it  was  brought  back 
under  the  pulpit  by  bringing  in  line. 
The  mother  came  with  it  and  swam 
under  the  pulpit  or  slightly  off  to  the 
side.  Never  did  a  female  attempt  to  hit 
the  boat  or  the  pulpit,  though  our 
small  sample  may  not  be  representative. 
A  head  net  bag  of  5  cm  nylon  mesh, 
also  containing  a  noose  of  1.25  cm 
nylon  line  and  similarly  positioned 
on  a  hoop  frame,  was  placed  over 
the  baby's  head.  Optimally  this  net 
was  deep  enough  to  extend  from  the 
tip  of  the  snout  to  just  posterior  to  the 
pectoral  flippers.  In  practice  our  nets 
were  too  small  for  all  but  one  animal 
and  placed  the  noose  anterior  to  the 
pectorals.  Even  so.  the  noose  did  not 
slip  loose. 

With  lines  fore  and  aft  the  young 
animal  was  severely  hampered  and 
could  be  pulled  in  rather  easily  by 
hand.  During  this  time  the  boat  and 
skiff  had  been  maneuvering  the  pair 
toward  the  east  bank  and  its  shallow 
shelf. 

Two  plastic  trash  barrels  containing 
the  coiled  head  and  tail  lines  were  lift- 
ed into  a  waiting  skiff  and  payed  out 
to  the  restrained  whale  until  the  shallow 
shelf  was  reached.  Then  the  lines  were 
taken  ashore  and  the  men.  usually 
four  to  six.  pulled  the  baby  sideways 
onto  the  shelf.  Usually  the  mother's 
efforts  were  strenuous  at  this  time,  and 
occasionally  she  looped  the  line  over 
her  body  or  tail  giving  an  irresistable 
pull,  but  always  she  rapidly  slipped 
free  and  the  baby  could  be  towed  in 
again.  The  baby  was  beached  in  about 
0.7  m  of  water.  10  m  or  so  from  the 
shelf  edge.  The  mother  was  unable  to 
enter  such  shallow  water,  though  she 
did  patrol  the  shelf  edge,  and  in  one 
case  partially  stranded  herself,  seem- 
ingly in  an  attempt  to  reach  the  baby. 
Thus  protected  from  the  obvious  ire 
of  the  mother,  it  was  rather  simple  to 


60 


place  ihc  harness  on  the  baby.  The 
danger  from  the  mother  was  made 
clear  when  a  crewman  began  working 
within  a  few  meters  of  one.  The  female 
whale  lifted  her  tail,  bent  it  back  and 
thrashed  the  flukes  around  in  a  semi- 
circle, horizontal  to  the  water  surface. 
She  missed  the  man  by  quite  a  dis- 
tance but  the  force  of  the  blow  was 
enough  to  send  a  sheet  of  water  over 
everyone  nearby. 

The  baby  remained  rather  quiet 
during  the  harnessing  process.  The 
harness  was  usually  slipped  on  under 
the  snout  and  v/orked  posteriorly  to 
the  pectorals  which  were  then  inserted 
through  the  harness.  The  harness  was 
then  tightened  in  place  until  snug  over 
the  baby's  body.  At  this  point,  timing 
for  harness  release  began  as  a  corrosi- 
ble  magnesium  bolt  which  held  the 
release  mechanism  began  to  corrode 
away  in  salt  water. 

Three  or  four  men  pushed  the  baby 
back  into  deep  water  over  the  shelf 
taking  care  to  avoid  the  mother.  In  all 
but  one  case  she  was  nearby  and 
quickls  took  up  station  with  her  off- 
spring. In  one  case  the  mother  left 
before  the  baby  was  launched  and 
was  a  kilometer  or  so  down  the  bay 
shore  when  the  baby  began  to  swim 
in  deep  water.  This  baby  cruised 
quietly  for  a  short  time  and  then,  when 
about  300  m  from  the  mother,  turned 
as  if  on  a  signal  and  raced  toward  her. 
The  mother  did  the  same,  turning 
toward  the  baby  and  beginning  to 
swim  rapidly.  Once  they  were  near 
the  mother  circled  the  baby,  thrashing 
the  water  with  her  flukes.  It  was  prob- 
able that  an  acoustic  recognition  sig- 
nal was  involved.  This  young  animal 
had  been  emitting  short  low  frequency 
signals  while  stranded.  Even  if  the 
young  did  become  separated  from  the 
mother  by  some  distance,  chances  for 
reunion  remained  excellent  because 
of  the  restricted  channels  available 
for  swimming. 

In  all  cases  the  presence  of  the  har- 
ness had  no  visible  effect  on  the  be- 
havior of  the  mother-young  pair. 


HARNESS  DESIGN 

The  harness  was  constructed  of 
four  lasers  of  one-way  stretch  Lino 
241,'  commonly  used  in  fabricating 
girdles  and  corsets,  that  permitted 
expansion  and  contraction  around  the 
whale's  circumference.  The  two  legs 
of  each  harness  half  (Figure  3)  were 
attached  together  ventrally  by  "D" 
rings  to  a  timed-release  mechanism. 
Dorsally  they  were  bolted  to  a  curved 
metal  plate  holding  the  radio  trans- 
mitter. Horizontal  rows  of  grommets 
5  cm  apart  in  the  heavy  plasiic- 
impregnated  nylon  reinforcing  band 
at  the  dorsal  ends  of  the  harness  legs 
allowed  adjustments  to  animals  of 
different  circumferences  and  allowed 
the  harness  to  be  secured  under  differ- 
ent degrees  of  tension.  We  pulled 
the  harnesses  snug  on  our  animals, 
which  prevented  flutter  from  water 
passing  around  the  swimming  animal 
and  kept  the  harness  in  place  during 
dives  (the  harness  was  40  cm  wide 
and  1  12  cm  long). 

The  strength  feature  of  the  harness 
was  a  2,5  cm  wide  by  0.6  cm  thick 
woven  nylon  strap  in  the  leading  and 
trailing  edge  of  each  harness  half. 
These  straps,  held  in  sewn  folds  of  the 
harness,  were  sewn  to  the  harness  only 
near  the  ventral  "D"  rings,  thus  per- 
mitting harness  and  straps  to  be  ad- 
justed independently  to  the  whale's 
circumference.  The  grommeted  ends 
of  both  the  harness  itself  and  the 
strengthening  straps  were  attached  to 
bolts  on  the  dorsal  plate  by  means  of 
knurled  nuts. 

A  plastic  cup  on  each  side  by  mid- 
body  simulated  an  instrument  housing, 
and  a  poK  vinyl  chloride  rod  sewn 
across  the  harness  above  the  pectorals 
acted  as  a  batten,  preventing  bunching 
of  the  harness  in  the  anterior-posterior 
direction. 

The  timed-release  mechanism  con- 
sisted to  two  aluminum  plates  held 
together    by    a    central    spring-loaded 

'  Reference  to  Irade  names  does  not  imply  en- 
dorsement by  the  National  Marine  Fishieries 
Service,  NCAA 


magnesium  bolt.  One  plate  had  four 
tapered  corner  posts  that  tit  into  four 
receptacles  on  the  other  plate.  The 
"D"  rings  of  the  harness  legs  slipped 
over  the  posts  and  over  four  strong 
springs  that  assisted  in  forcing  the 
plates  apart  during  jettisoning.  All 
tensions  of  the  harness  and  nylon 
straps  were  e.xerted  against  these  posts. 
The  magnesium  bolt  bore  only  the 
vertical  strain  of  a  spring  between  the 
two  plates. 

The  wall  thickness  of  the  magnes- 
ium bolt  determined  the  interval  be- 
tween submergence  in  seawater  and 
the  time  of  breakage.  When  the  bolt 
broke  the  springs  forced  the  two  plates 
apart  and  released  the  "D"  rings  from 
their  posts.  Corrosion  of  the  bolts  was 
insured  by  a  central  copper  sleeve  that 
promoted  rapid  electrolysis. 

The  dorsal  plate  to  which  the  har- 
ness attached  was  constructed  of  ?  mm 
curved  aluminum,  designed  to  fit  over 
the  body  contour  of  a  baby  whale. 
An  Ocean  Applied  Research  Model 
PT-202  radio  transmitter  was  secured 
to  the  center  of  this  plate,  and  a  paint- 
ed yellow  cap  moulded  of  high  density 
polyurethan  foam  was  fitted  over  the 
transmitter  for  flotation.  Foam  neo- 
prene  sheeting  was  glued  to  the  ventral 
surface  of  this  plate  to  prevent  chafing 
the  whale's  skin. 

To  fasten  the  harness  around  the 
animal,  the  two  halves,  connected 
ventrally  to  the  timed-release  mechan- 
ism, were  slid  under  the  animal  and 
the  pectoral  flippers  inserted  through 
the  harness.  The  radio,  float,  and  plate 
were  placed  on  the  dorsal  midline, 
and  each  harness  half  was  pulled  tight; 
the  appropriate  rows  of  grommets 
in  the  harness  were  fitted  over  bolts  in 
the  dorsal  plate  and  the  nuts  tightened 
down.  Then  the  excess  rows  of  grom- 
mets were  cut  off  with  a  knife  and  the 
heavy  nylon  straps  secured  in  place 
and  similarly  trimmed.  Finally  straps 
from  the  float  were  attached,  and  the 
calf  was  ready  to  be  launched  to  its 
mother.  Figure  4  shows  the  harness 
and  radio  in  place  as  the  released  calf 
joins  its  mother. 


61 


Figure  3. — The  harness,  radio  transmitter  and 
timed  release  mechanism:  (A)  OAR  PT-202 
radio  transmitter  (B)  5  mm  curved  aluminum 
dorsal  plate  (C)  Plastic-impregnated  nylon  re- 
inforcing sewn  on  harness  of  Lino  i^  241  material 
(D)  Nylon  reinforcing  strap  sewn  into  harness 
and  bolted  to  dorsal  plate  (E)  Rows  of  grommets 

(F)  Knurled  nuts  holding  harness  to  dorsal  plate 

(G)  Instrument  housing  (H)  Polyvinyl  chloride  bat- 
ten (I)  Harness  legs  with  "D"  rings  (J)  Polyurethan 
flotation  device  attached  by  straps  to  dorsal 
plate  (K)  Timed-release  mechanism  (L)  Alu- 
minum corner  posts  to  which  "D"  rings  of  har- 
ness legs  attach  (M)  Receptacles  for  above 
posts — spring  loaded  (N)  Magnesium  bolt 
passes  through  spring  loaded  hole  in  top  plate 
and  secured  with  a  nut. 

Dimensions:  (1)  Harness  width  40  cm  (2) 
Harness  length  112  cm  from  timed — release 
mechanism  to  first  row  of  grommets  <3)  Distance 
between  each  of  five  rows  of  grommets  —  5  cm 
(4)  Length  of  harness  legs  40  cm  (5)  Timed 
release  mechanism  10  x  is  cm. 


TRACKING  AND 
HARNESS  RECOVERY 

The  three  harnessed  whales  re- 
mained within  a  few  hundred  meters 
of  their  release  points  (see  Figure  1). 
Visual  tracking  in  daylight  was  greatly 
assisted  by  the  bright  yellow  float  and 
upper  harness  which  were  visible  even 
a  foot  or  two  underwater. 

in  the  first  release,  after  some  time 
in  the  water,  the  calf  swam  purpose- 
full>  toward  the  Unison,  turned  on 
her  side,  and  rubbed  the  harness 
against  the  hull  and  keel  of  the  boat — 
breaking  the  float  partly  loose,  releas- 
ing one  "D"  ring,  and  snapping  the 
fiberglass  radio  antenna.  Transmission 
of  radio  signals  immediately  ceased. 
This  damage  could  have  been  prevent- 
ed by  our  maintaining  a  greater  dis- 
tance from  the  harnessed  animal.  The 
timed-release  mechanism  contained  a 
."^-hour  bolt  which  had  not  released 
by  the  time  darkness  fell.  The  harness 
was  recovered  2  days  later  in  vegeta- 
tion along  the  channel  edge,  about  2 
km  from  the  release  point. 

The  second  release,  timed  for  some- 
what less  than  5  hours,  went  flawlessly, 
including  radio  tracking  and  harness 
release. 

The  third  release  was  planned  for 
20  hours,  with  tracking  overnight 
from  the  Loiisim.  To  assist  after  dark 
should  the  radio  malfunction,  a  water- 
proof lifejacket  light  was  ti.xed  to  the 
float.  Though  both  radio  and  light 
functioned  at  release,  thev  failed  before 


62 


Figure  4. — Mother  and  young  swimming  with  harness  and  radio  in  place. 


dark,  and  the  animal  was  lost  during 
the  night.  However,  shortly  after  dawn 
the  released  harness  was  found  floating 
within  60  m  of  the  vessel.  Details 
of  these  releases  and  trackings  are 
presented  in  Table  1. 

DISCUSSION 

The  capture  methods  described  here 
for  suckling  gray  whales  are  remark- 
ably effective  and  simple.  Except  when 
the  mother  is  under  the  pulpit  or  at 
the  edge  of  shallow  water,  the  methods 
seem  relatively  safe.  Given  enough 
shipboard  power  the  noosing  methods 
would  work  with  larger  animals, 
though  the  sheer  bulk  of  an  adult 
would  make  any  movement  by  the 
whale,  purposive  or  not.  dangerous. 
This  would  certainly  be  a  prime  con- 
sideration in  any  attempt  to  affi.x  a 
harness  on  an  adult. 

The  harness  described  here  would, 
with  minor  modifications,  serve  nicely 
for  short-term  tracking  and  instru- 
mentation of  small  gray  whales.  Be- 
cause a  whale  attains  66-72  percent  of 
its  adult  size  in  the  first  year  (Rice 
and  Wolman.  1971).  growth  during 
the  first  months  is  e-xtremely  rapid. 
Harnesses  for  periods  of  more  than  a 
week  must  therefore  include  a  device 
that  allows  for  growth  but  also  keeps 
a   constant    tension   and   locks   if  the 


Table  1. — Harnessing  and  tracking  of  gray  whale  calves. 


Animal 

Planned 

Netting 

to 

number 

Girth 

Length 

bolt  life 

beachir 

'9 

Beaching 

to 

Date 

and  name 

Sex 

(m) 

(m) 

(hr) 

(mm) 

release  (m 

in) 

Tracking 

1/27/73 

(1)  Carl(a) 

F 

2  41 

4  80 

5± 

30  ± 

37  ± 

4  hr,  45  mm 
track,  release 
time  uncertain 

1/28/73 

(2)  Lee 

M 

2  17 

4,20 

5± 

18  ± 

14  ± 

3  hr,  16  mm 

1/29/73 

(3)  Baia 

F 

2.51 

5  16 

20  ± 

28  ± 

8± 

17  hr.  23  mm 
to  harness 
recovery.  Time 
to  release 
uncertain. 

animal  rubs  the  harness  against  under- 
water obstructions. 

Another  concern  on  any  long-term 
track  is  abrasion  of  the  harness.  The 
purposive  rubbing  of  whale  No.  1 
against  the  capture  ship  and  its  mother 
caused  damage  to  the  radio  antenna 
and  serious  abrasion  to  the  lower  har- 
ness legs.  On  whale  No.  2  the  abdomi- 
nal legs  of  the  harness  were  abraded 
through  the  girdle  fabric  and  into  the 
flat  nylon  strap  in  several  places,  even 
though  the  animal  wore  the  harness 
for  only  ?•  hours.  16  minutes.  Behavi- 
oral observations  suggest  that  much 
harness  wear  results  when  the  baby 
rubs  against  the  barnacle-covered 
back  of  the  mother  and  slides  to  one 
side  as  she  surfaces.  None  of  these 
problems  was  more  than  very  minor 
in  these  tests.  But  clearly  long-term 
tracking  with  increased  exposure  to 
obstacles    along    the    migratory    path 


will  exacerbate  these  problems  greatly. 
More  durable  materials,  such  as  metal 
or  the  strongest  fabric,  and  more  re- 
silient radio  antennae  will  be  needed 
for  successful  long-term  tracking. 

The  release  mechanism  dependent 
upon  magnesium  bolt  corrosion  worked 
adequately,  but  variations  in  water 
temperature  and  salinity  could  un- 
predictably alter  release  time.  Long 
release  times  (more  than  a  week)  may 
require  a  new  system,  such  as  the  use 
of  electroexplosive  or  electronic  re- 
lease mechanisms  that  might  allow  an 
operator  to  release  the  harness  upon 
command. 

Harnessing  is  probably  the  least 
injurious  means  of  attaching  instru- 
ments to  cetaceans,  and  harness  place- 
ment around  the  pectoral  flipper  area 
is  probably  optimal.  Pectoral  place- 
ment insures  maximum  exposure  of 
the  antenna,  minimal  body  movement 


63 


during  swimming,  and  relatively  little 
change  in  girth  during  diving.  Further, 
when  physiological  data  are  to  be  tak- 
en, most  important  vital  areas  (lungs, 
heart,  brain)  are  nearby. 

In  our  opinion  package  volume 
could  be  relativeh  high,  providing  it  is 
weight  compensated  until  nearly  iso- 
static.  A  baby  whale  might  well  carry 
15-20  kg  of  instruments  properly 
housed  and  shaped  to  reduce  drag. 
Instrument  placement  is  probably  best 
just  above  or  between  pectorals  where 
it  would  cause  the  least  disequilibrium. 
In  these  positions  it  would  be  most 
difficult  for  the  whale  to  rub  the  instru- 
ments loose.  Any  such  package,  of 
course,  would  have  to  be  strongly 
protected  from   impact   and  abrasion. 

The  harness  used  here  was  designed 
with  a  float  at  the  top  to  suspend  the 
antenna  with  the  harness  hanging  be- 
low so  that  when  cast  off  it  rode  easily 
with  the  antenna  in  the  vertical  posi- 
tion for  good  transmission. 

In  conclusion,  the  first  steps  of  whale 
capture  and  instrumentation  have  been 
taken,  but  much  remains  to  be  done 
to  transfer  the  methods  to  (I)  long 
term  trackings.  (2)  other  species  which 
must  be  caught  and  handled  at  sea, 
and  {})  adult  whales. 


Jose  Castello  of  the  Consejo  Nacional 
Ciencias  y  Tecnologi'a,  Mexico  City; 
and  Jaime  Dommguez  and  Mario 
Camparan  of  the  Escuela  Superior  de 
Ciencias  Marinas,  Ensenada,  Baja 
California  Norte,  Mexico. 

We  thank  Frank  Brocato  for  con- 
sultation on  whale  capture  and  for 
constructing  much  of  our  gear. 

We  are  especially  grateful  to  Edwin 
Janss  and  Richard  Wheeler  of  the 
Janss  Foundation  for  support  of  the 
field  study.  A  National  Aeronautics 
and  Space  Administration  subcontract 
No.  23196  (NA.SA  NAS2-68601  al- 
lowed harness  preparation. 


LITERATURE  CITED 

Anonymous.       In  press.  Report  of  Working 

Group  on  Bio.  and  Nail.  Hist.  In  W.  E. 

Schevill     (editor).    The    Whale     Problem. 

Harvard  Press,  Cambridge,  pp  .''-10. 
Clarke,     R.      \^^1.     Migrations    of    marine 

mammals.     [In    Engl,    and    Norw.]     Nor. 

Hvalfangsl-Tid.  46:609-6.K). 
Cousteau,  J.  Y.      1972.     The  whale.  Mighty 

monarch    of  the   sea.   Doubleday    &.    Co., 

Garden  City,  .104  p. 
Eberhardt.    R.   L.,   and   K.   S.   Norns.      1964. 

Observations     of     newborn     Pacific     gray 

whales    on    Mexican    calving    grounds.    J. 

Mammal.  4.S(1):88-9.S. 
Rice,    D.    W..    and    A.    A.    Wolman.      1971. 

The   life   history   and  ecology  of  the  gray 

whale    {Exchruiuiiis    rohusiti.s).    Am.    Soc. 

Mammal..  Spec.  Publ.  No.  .1,  142  p. 
Spencer.  M.  P.      197.1.     Scientific  studies  on 

the  gray  whales  of  Laguna  Ojo  de  liebre 

(Scammon's     Lagoon),     Baja     California, 

Mexico.  Natl.  Geogr.  Soc.  Res.  Rep.,  1966 

projects,  p.  23-*'-25.1. 


MFR  Paper  1059.  From  Marine  Fisheries  Review,  Vol. 
36,  No.  4,  April,  1974.  Copies  of  this  paper,  in  limited 
numbers,  are  available  from  D83,  Technical  Information 
Division.  Environmental  Science  Information  Center. 
NOAA,  Washington.  DC  20235. 


ACKNOWLEDGMENTS 

Permission  to  study  the  gray  whale 
came  from  both  the  Mexican  and 
United  States  governments,  and  many 
people  helped.  Prominent  were  Carl 
L.  Hubbs  of  Scripps  Institution  of 
Oceanography;  George  Gross,  U.S. 
Fisheries  Attache,  U.S.  Embassy, 
Mexico  City;  and  Philip  Roedel  and 
Robert  Miller  of  National  Oceanic 
and  Atmospheric  Administration,  U.S. 
Department  of  Commerce.  We  thank 
our  willing  and  skillful  field  crew: 
Captain  Tim  Houshar  and  the  crew 
of  the  Louson,  Richard  Pierce,  Ken- 
neth Balcomb.  and  Thomas  P.  Dohl 
of  the  University  of  California,  Santa 
Cruz;  Gerald  Kooyman  of  Scripps 
Institution  of  Oceanography;  Robert 
Gibson  oi  the  Franklin  Institute  Re- 
search      Laboratories.       Philadelphia; 


Opposite. — Gigi  II,  witti  transmitter  affixed  to 
back,  awaits  release  at  sea  off  San  Diego.  Ptioto 
by  J.  S.  Leattierwood,  courtesy  of  Naval  Under- 
sea Center.  San  Diego,  Calif. 


Vf  GPO  799   418 


64 


UNITED  STATES 
DEPARTMENT  OF   COAAMERCE 

NATIONAL  OCEANIC  AND  ATMOSPHERIC  ADMINISTRATION 

NATIONAL  MARINE  FISHERIES  SERVICE 

SCIENTIFIC  PUBLICATIONS  STAFF 

ROOM  450 

1107  N  E    45TH  ST 

SEATTLE    WA  98105 


FOURTH  CLASS 


POSTAGE  AND  FEES  PAID 

U  S    DEPARTMENT  OF  COMMERCE 

COM-210 


OFFICIAL  BUSINESS 


'^?6-l9l^ 


<    \